Fossil SCM
Assorted fixes of typos and grammar in code comments. No functional changes.
Commit
e2bdc10572c51069ebd63951d082c65d995838924bad2bad94fd5bcfe53c88e8
Parent
10006db404afa55…
74 files changed
+2
-2
+1
-1
+5
-5
+1
-1
+5
-5
+7
-7
+1
-1
+2
-2
+3
-3
+2
-2
+2
-2
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+2
-2
+6
-6
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+2
-2
+2
-2
+1
-1
+1
-1
+2
-2
+1
-1
+1
-1
+2
-2
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+4
-4
+1
-1
+6
-6
+3
-3
+2
-2
+4
-4
+3
-3
+2
-2
+6
-6
+2
-2
+1
-1
+2
-2
+2
-2
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+5
-5
+1
-1
+2
-2
+1
-1
+1
-1
+1
-1
+7
-7
+2
-2
+1
-1
+2
-2
+1
-1
+2
-2
+1
-1
+1
-1
+5
-5
+1
-1
+2
-2
+3
-3
+2
-2
+1
-1
~
src/add.c
~
src/ajax.c
~
src/alerts.c
~
src/backlink.c
~
src/blob.c
~
src/branch.c
~
src/builtin.c
~
src/cache.c
~
src/captcha.c
~
src/cgi.c
~
src/checkin.c
~
src/color.c
~
src/comformat.c
~
src/config.h
~
src/configure.c
~
src/content.c
~
src/db.c
~
src/delta.c
~
src/descendants.c
~
src/diff.c
~
src/diffcmd.c
~
src/dispatch.c
~
src/event.c
~
src/export.c
~
src/fileedit.c
~
src/forum.c
~
src/fossil.diff.js
~
src/fossil.page.chat.js
~
src/fossil.wikiedit-wysiwyg.js
~
src/fshell.c
~
src/glob.c
~
src/hname.c
~
src/hook.c
~
src/http.c
~
src/http_ssl.c
~
src/json.c
~
src/json_report.c
~
src/login.c
~
src/main.c
~
src/manifest.c
~
src/markdown.c
~
src/merge.c
~
src/merge3.c
~
src/printf.c
~
src/purge.c
~
src/report.c
~
src/schema.c
~
src/search.c
~
src/security_audit.c
~
src/setupuser.c
~
src/sha1.c
~
src/skins.c
~
src/smtp.c
~
src/sqlcmd.c
~
src/style.c
~
src/sync.c
~
src/tar.c
~
src/terminal.c
~
src/th.c
~
src/th_main.c
~
src/timeline.c
~
src/tkt.c
~
src/tktsetup.c
~
src/undo.c
~
src/unicode.c
~
src/update.c
~
src/util.c
~
src/wiki.c
~
src/wikiformat.c
~
src/winhttp.c
~
src/xfer.c
~
src/xsystem.c
~
src/zip.c
~
tools/codecheck1.c
+2
-2
| --- src/add.c | ||
| +++ src/add.c | ||
| @@ -353,11 +353,11 @@ | ||
| 353 | 353 | ** for files to be excluded. Example: '*.o,*.obj,*.exe' If the --ignore |
| 354 | 354 | ** option does not appear on the command line then the "ignore-glob" setting |
| 355 | 355 | ** is used. If the --clean option does not appear on the command line then |
| 356 | 356 | ** the "clean-glob" setting is used. |
| 357 | 357 | ** |
| 358 | -** When attempting to explicitly add files on the commandline, and if those | |
| 358 | +** When attempting to explicitly add files on the command line, and if those | |
| 359 | 359 | ** match "ignore-glob", a confirmation is asked first. This can be prevented |
| 360 | 360 | ** using the -f|--force option. |
| 361 | 361 | ** |
| 362 | 362 | ** The --case-sensitive option determines whether or not filenames should |
| 363 | 363 | ** be treated case sensitive or not. If the option is not given, the default |
| @@ -476,11 +476,11 @@ | ||
| 476 | 476 | } |
| 477 | 477 | glob_free(pIgnore); |
| 478 | 478 | glob_free(pClean); |
| 479 | 479 | |
| 480 | 480 | /** Check for Windows-reserved names and warn or exit, as |
| 481 | - ** appopriate. Note that the 'add' internal machinery already | |
| 481 | + ** appropriate. Note that the 'add' internal machinery already | |
| 482 | 482 | ** _silently_ skips over any names for which |
| 483 | 483 | ** file_is_reserved_name() returns true or which is in the |
| 484 | 484 | ** fossil_reserved_name() list. We do not need to warn for those, |
| 485 | 485 | ** as they're outright verboten. */ |
| 486 | 486 | if(db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM sfile WHERE win_reserved(pathname)")){ |
| 487 | 487 |
| --- src/add.c | |
| +++ src/add.c | |
| @@ -353,11 +353,11 @@ | |
| 353 | ** for files to be excluded. Example: '*.o,*.obj,*.exe' If the --ignore |
| 354 | ** option does not appear on the command line then the "ignore-glob" setting |
| 355 | ** is used. If the --clean option does not appear on the command line then |
| 356 | ** the "clean-glob" setting is used. |
| 357 | ** |
| 358 | ** When attempting to explicitly add files on the commandline, and if those |
| 359 | ** match "ignore-glob", a confirmation is asked first. This can be prevented |
| 360 | ** using the -f|--force option. |
| 361 | ** |
| 362 | ** The --case-sensitive option determines whether or not filenames should |
| 363 | ** be treated case sensitive or not. If the option is not given, the default |
| @@ -476,11 +476,11 @@ | |
| 476 | } |
| 477 | glob_free(pIgnore); |
| 478 | glob_free(pClean); |
| 479 | |
| 480 | /** Check for Windows-reserved names and warn or exit, as |
| 481 | ** appopriate. Note that the 'add' internal machinery already |
| 482 | ** _silently_ skips over any names for which |
| 483 | ** file_is_reserved_name() returns true or which is in the |
| 484 | ** fossil_reserved_name() list. We do not need to warn for those, |
| 485 | ** as they're outright verboten. */ |
| 486 | if(db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM sfile WHERE win_reserved(pathname)")){ |
| 487 |
| --- src/add.c | |
| +++ src/add.c | |
| @@ -353,11 +353,11 @@ | |
| 353 | ** for files to be excluded. Example: '*.o,*.obj,*.exe' If the --ignore |
| 354 | ** option does not appear on the command line then the "ignore-glob" setting |
| 355 | ** is used. If the --clean option does not appear on the command line then |
| 356 | ** the "clean-glob" setting is used. |
| 357 | ** |
| 358 | ** When attempting to explicitly add files on the command line, and if those |
| 359 | ** match "ignore-glob", a confirmation is asked first. This can be prevented |
| 360 | ** using the -f|--force option. |
| 361 | ** |
| 362 | ** The --case-sensitive option determines whether or not filenames should |
| 363 | ** be treated case sensitive or not. If the option is not given, the default |
| @@ -476,11 +476,11 @@ | |
| 476 | } |
| 477 | glob_free(pIgnore); |
| 478 | glob_free(pClean); |
| 479 | |
| 480 | /** Check for Windows-reserved names and warn or exit, as |
| 481 | ** appropriate. Note that the 'add' internal machinery already |
| 482 | ** _silently_ skips over any names for which |
| 483 | ** file_is_reserved_name() returns true or which is in the |
| 484 | ** fossil_reserved_name() list. We do not need to warn for those, |
| 485 | ** as they're outright verboten. */ |
| 486 | if(db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM sfile WHERE win_reserved(pathname)")){ |
| 487 |
+1
-1
| --- src/ajax.c | ||
| +++ src/ajax.c | ||
| @@ -395,11 +395,11 @@ | ||
| 395 | 395 | const AjaxRoute routes[] = { |
| 396 | 396 | /* Keep these sorted by zName (for bsearch()) */ |
| 397 | 397 | {"preview-text", ajax_route_preview_text, 0, 1 |
| 398 | 398 | /* Note that this does not require write permissions in the repo. |
| 399 | 399 | ** It should arguably require write permissions but doing means |
| 400 | - ** that /chat does not work without checkin permissions: | |
| 400 | + ** that /chat does not work without check-in permissions: | |
| 401 | 401 | ** |
| 402 | 402 | ** https://fossil-scm.org/forum/forumpost/ed4a762b3a557898 |
| 403 | 403 | ** |
| 404 | 404 | ** This particular route is used by /fileedit and /chat, whereas |
| 405 | 405 | ** /wikiedit uses a simpler wiki-specific route. |
| 406 | 406 |
| --- src/ajax.c | |
| +++ src/ajax.c | |
| @@ -395,11 +395,11 @@ | |
| 395 | const AjaxRoute routes[] = { |
| 396 | /* Keep these sorted by zName (for bsearch()) */ |
| 397 | {"preview-text", ajax_route_preview_text, 0, 1 |
| 398 | /* Note that this does not require write permissions in the repo. |
| 399 | ** It should arguably require write permissions but doing means |
| 400 | ** that /chat does not work without checkin permissions: |
| 401 | ** |
| 402 | ** https://fossil-scm.org/forum/forumpost/ed4a762b3a557898 |
| 403 | ** |
| 404 | ** This particular route is used by /fileedit and /chat, whereas |
| 405 | ** /wikiedit uses a simpler wiki-specific route. |
| 406 |
| --- src/ajax.c | |
| +++ src/ajax.c | |
| @@ -395,11 +395,11 @@ | |
| 395 | const AjaxRoute routes[] = { |
| 396 | /* Keep these sorted by zName (for bsearch()) */ |
| 397 | {"preview-text", ajax_route_preview_text, 0, 1 |
| 398 | /* Note that this does not require write permissions in the repo. |
| 399 | ** It should arguably require write permissions but doing means |
| 400 | ** that /chat does not work without check-in permissions: |
| 401 | ** |
| 402 | ** https://fossil-scm.org/forum/forumpost/ed4a762b3a557898 |
| 403 | ** |
| 404 | ** This particular route is used by /fileedit and /chat, whereas |
| 405 | ** /wikiedit uses a simpler wiki-specific route. |
| 406 |
+5
-5
| --- src/alerts.c | ||
| +++ src/alerts.c | ||
| @@ -664,11 +664,11 @@ | ||
| 664 | 664 | return p; |
| 665 | 665 | } |
| 666 | 666 | |
| 667 | 667 | /* |
| 668 | 668 | ** Scan the header of the email message in pMsg looking for the |
| 669 | -** (first) occurrance of zField. Fill pValue with the content of | |
| 669 | +** (first) occurrence of zField. Fill pValue with the content of | |
| 670 | 670 | ** that field. |
| 671 | 671 | ** |
| 672 | 672 | ** This routine initializes pValue. Any prior content of pValue is |
| 673 | 673 | ** discarded (leaked). |
| 674 | 674 | ** |
| @@ -710,11 +710,11 @@ | ||
| 710 | 710 | /* |
| 711 | 711 | ** Determine whether or not the input string is a valid email address. |
| 712 | 712 | ** Only look at character up to but not including the first \000 or |
| 713 | 713 | ** the first cTerm character, whichever comes first. |
| 714 | 714 | ** |
| 715 | -** Return the length of the email addresss string in bytes if the email | |
| 715 | +** Return the length of the email address string in bytes if the email | |
| 716 | 716 | ** address is valid. If the email address is misformed, return 0. |
| 717 | 717 | */ |
| 718 | 718 | int email_address_is_valid(const char *z, char cTerm){ |
| 719 | 719 | int i; |
| 720 | 720 | int nAt = 0; |
| @@ -2955,12 +2955,12 @@ | ||
| 2955 | 2955 | Blob *pBody, /* Write email body here */ |
| 2956 | 2956 | const char *zCode, /* The subscriber code */ |
| 2957 | 2957 | int lastContact, /* Last contact (days since 1970) */ |
| 2958 | 2958 | const char *zEAddr, /* Subscriber email address. Send to this. */ |
| 2959 | 2959 | const char *zSub, /* Subscription codes */ |
| 2960 | - const char *zRepoName, /* Name of the sending Fossil repostory */ | |
| 2961 | - const char *zUrl /* URL for the sending Fossil repostory */ | |
| 2960 | + const char *zRepoName, /* Name of the sending Fossil repository */ | |
| 2961 | + const char *zUrl /* URL for the sending Fossil repository */ | |
| 2962 | 2962 | ){ |
| 2963 | 2963 | blob_appendf(pHdr,"To: <%s>\r\n", zEAddr); |
| 2964 | 2964 | blob_appendf(pHdr,"Subject: %s Subscription to %s expires soon\r\n", |
| 2965 | 2965 | zRepoName, zUrl); |
| 2966 | 2966 | blob_appendf(pBody, |
| @@ -3466,11 +3466,11 @@ | ||
| 3466 | 3466 | @ </form> |
| 3467 | 3467 | style_finish_page(); |
| 3468 | 3468 | } |
| 3469 | 3469 | |
| 3470 | 3470 | /* |
| 3471 | -** Send an annoucement message described by query parameter. | |
| 3471 | +** Send an announcement message described by query parameter. | |
| 3472 | 3472 | ** Permission to do this has already been verified. |
| 3473 | 3473 | */ |
| 3474 | 3474 | static char *alert_send_announcement(void){ |
| 3475 | 3475 | AlertSender *pSender; |
| 3476 | 3476 | char *zErr; |
| 3477 | 3477 |
| --- src/alerts.c | |
| +++ src/alerts.c | |
| @@ -664,11 +664,11 @@ | |
| 664 | return p; |
| 665 | } |
| 666 | |
| 667 | /* |
| 668 | ** Scan the header of the email message in pMsg looking for the |
| 669 | ** (first) occurrance of zField. Fill pValue with the content of |
| 670 | ** that field. |
| 671 | ** |
| 672 | ** This routine initializes pValue. Any prior content of pValue is |
| 673 | ** discarded (leaked). |
| 674 | ** |
| @@ -710,11 +710,11 @@ | |
| 710 | /* |
| 711 | ** Determine whether or not the input string is a valid email address. |
| 712 | ** Only look at character up to but not including the first \000 or |
| 713 | ** the first cTerm character, whichever comes first. |
| 714 | ** |
| 715 | ** Return the length of the email addresss string in bytes if the email |
| 716 | ** address is valid. If the email address is misformed, return 0. |
| 717 | */ |
| 718 | int email_address_is_valid(const char *z, char cTerm){ |
| 719 | int i; |
| 720 | int nAt = 0; |
| @@ -2955,12 +2955,12 @@ | |
| 2955 | Blob *pBody, /* Write email body here */ |
| 2956 | const char *zCode, /* The subscriber code */ |
| 2957 | int lastContact, /* Last contact (days since 1970) */ |
| 2958 | const char *zEAddr, /* Subscriber email address. Send to this. */ |
| 2959 | const char *zSub, /* Subscription codes */ |
| 2960 | const char *zRepoName, /* Name of the sending Fossil repostory */ |
| 2961 | const char *zUrl /* URL for the sending Fossil repostory */ |
| 2962 | ){ |
| 2963 | blob_appendf(pHdr,"To: <%s>\r\n", zEAddr); |
| 2964 | blob_appendf(pHdr,"Subject: %s Subscription to %s expires soon\r\n", |
| 2965 | zRepoName, zUrl); |
| 2966 | blob_appendf(pBody, |
| @@ -3466,11 +3466,11 @@ | |
| 3466 | @ </form> |
| 3467 | style_finish_page(); |
| 3468 | } |
| 3469 | |
| 3470 | /* |
| 3471 | ** Send an annoucement message described by query parameter. |
| 3472 | ** Permission to do this has already been verified. |
| 3473 | */ |
| 3474 | static char *alert_send_announcement(void){ |
| 3475 | AlertSender *pSender; |
| 3476 | char *zErr; |
| 3477 |
| --- src/alerts.c | |
| +++ src/alerts.c | |
| @@ -664,11 +664,11 @@ | |
| 664 | return p; |
| 665 | } |
| 666 | |
| 667 | /* |
| 668 | ** Scan the header of the email message in pMsg looking for the |
| 669 | ** (first) occurrence of zField. Fill pValue with the content of |
| 670 | ** that field. |
| 671 | ** |
| 672 | ** This routine initializes pValue. Any prior content of pValue is |
| 673 | ** discarded (leaked). |
| 674 | ** |
| @@ -710,11 +710,11 @@ | |
| 710 | /* |
| 711 | ** Determine whether or not the input string is a valid email address. |
| 712 | ** Only look at character up to but not including the first \000 or |
| 713 | ** the first cTerm character, whichever comes first. |
| 714 | ** |
| 715 | ** Return the length of the email address string in bytes if the email |
| 716 | ** address is valid. If the email address is misformed, return 0. |
| 717 | */ |
| 718 | int email_address_is_valid(const char *z, char cTerm){ |
| 719 | int i; |
| 720 | int nAt = 0; |
| @@ -2955,12 +2955,12 @@ | |
| 2955 | Blob *pBody, /* Write email body here */ |
| 2956 | const char *zCode, /* The subscriber code */ |
| 2957 | int lastContact, /* Last contact (days since 1970) */ |
| 2958 | const char *zEAddr, /* Subscriber email address. Send to this. */ |
| 2959 | const char *zSub, /* Subscription codes */ |
| 2960 | const char *zRepoName, /* Name of the sending Fossil repository */ |
| 2961 | const char *zUrl /* URL for the sending Fossil repository */ |
| 2962 | ){ |
| 2963 | blob_appendf(pHdr,"To: <%s>\r\n", zEAddr); |
| 2964 | blob_appendf(pHdr,"Subject: %s Subscription to %s expires soon\r\n", |
| 2965 | zRepoName, zUrl); |
| 2966 | blob_appendf(pBody, |
| @@ -3466,11 +3466,11 @@ | |
| 3466 | @ </form> |
| 3467 | style_finish_page(); |
| 3468 | } |
| 3469 | |
| 3470 | /* |
| 3471 | ** Send an announcement message described by query parameter. |
| 3472 | ** Permission to do this has already been verified. |
| 3473 | */ |
| 3474 | static char *alert_send_announcement(void){ |
| 3475 | AlertSender *pSender; |
| 3476 | char *zErr; |
| 3477 |
+1
-1
| --- src/backlink.c | ||
| +++ src/backlink.c | ||
| @@ -338,11 +338,11 @@ | ||
| 338 | 338 | blob_reset(&in); |
| 339 | 339 | } |
| 340 | 340 | |
| 341 | 341 | /* |
| 342 | 342 | ** Transform mimetype string into an integer code. |
| 343 | -** NOTE: In the sake of compatability empty string is parsed as MT_UNKNOWN; | |
| 343 | +** NOTE: In the sake of compatibility empty string is parsed as MT_UNKNOWN; | |
| 344 | 344 | ** it is yet unclear whether it can safely be changed to MT_NONE. |
| 345 | 345 | */ |
| 346 | 346 | int parse_mimetype(const char* zMimetype){ |
| 347 | 347 | if( zMimetype==0 ) return MT_NONE; |
| 348 | 348 | if( strstr(zMimetype,"wiki")!=0 ) return MT_WIKI; |
| 349 | 349 |
| --- src/backlink.c | |
| +++ src/backlink.c | |
| @@ -338,11 +338,11 @@ | |
| 338 | blob_reset(&in); |
| 339 | } |
| 340 | |
| 341 | /* |
| 342 | ** Transform mimetype string into an integer code. |
| 343 | ** NOTE: In the sake of compatability empty string is parsed as MT_UNKNOWN; |
| 344 | ** it is yet unclear whether it can safely be changed to MT_NONE. |
| 345 | */ |
| 346 | int parse_mimetype(const char* zMimetype){ |
| 347 | if( zMimetype==0 ) return MT_NONE; |
| 348 | if( strstr(zMimetype,"wiki")!=0 ) return MT_WIKI; |
| 349 |
| --- src/backlink.c | |
| +++ src/backlink.c | |
| @@ -338,11 +338,11 @@ | |
| 338 | blob_reset(&in); |
| 339 | } |
| 340 | |
| 341 | /* |
| 342 | ** Transform mimetype string into an integer code. |
| 343 | ** NOTE: In the sake of compatibility empty string is parsed as MT_UNKNOWN; |
| 344 | ** it is yet unclear whether it can safely be changed to MT_NONE. |
| 345 | */ |
| 346 | int parse_mimetype(const char* zMimetype){ |
| 347 | if( zMimetype==0 ) return MT_NONE; |
| 348 | if( strstr(zMimetype,"wiki")!=0 ) return MT_WIKI; |
| 349 |
+5
-5
| --- src/blob.c | ||
| +++ src/blob.c | ||
| @@ -782,11 +782,11 @@ | ||
| 782 | 782 | ** end-of-file. |
| 783 | 783 | ** |
| 784 | 784 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first byte past the |
| 785 | 785 | ** \n that terminated the line. |
| 786 | 786 | ** |
| 787 | -** pTo will be an ephermeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter | |
| 787 | +** pTo will be an ephemeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter | |
| 788 | 788 | ** pTo as well. |
| 789 | 789 | */ |
| 790 | 790 | int blob_line(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 791 | 791 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 792 | 792 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -825,11 +825,11 @@ | ||
| 825 | 825 | ** whitespace is ignored. |
| 826 | 826 | ** |
| 827 | 827 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first character past |
| 828 | 828 | ** the end of the token. |
| 829 | 829 | ** |
| 830 | -** pTo will be an ephermeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter | |
| 830 | +** pTo will be an ephemeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter | |
| 831 | 831 | ** pTo as well. |
| 832 | 832 | */ |
| 833 | 833 | int blob_token(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 834 | 834 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 835 | 835 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -853,11 +853,11 @@ | ||
| 853 | 853 | ** (ignoring double '') or by the end of the string |
| 854 | 854 | ** |
| 855 | 855 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first character past |
| 856 | 856 | ** the end of the token. |
| 857 | 857 | ** |
| 858 | -** pTo will be an ephermeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter | |
| 858 | +** pTo will be an ephemeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter | |
| 859 | 859 | ** pTo as well. |
| 860 | 860 | */ |
| 861 | 861 | int blob_sqltoken(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 862 | 862 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 863 | 863 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -881,11 +881,11 @@ | ||
| 881 | 881 | return pTo->nUsed; |
| 882 | 882 | } |
| 883 | 883 | |
| 884 | 884 | /* |
| 885 | 885 | ** Extract everything from the current cursor to the end of the blob |
| 886 | -** into a new blob. The new blob is an ephemerial reference to the | |
| 886 | +** into a new blob. The new blob is an ephemeral reference to the | |
| 887 | 887 | ** original blob. The cursor of the original blob is unchanged. |
| 888 | 888 | */ |
| 889 | 889 | int blob_tail(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 890 | 890 | int iCursor = pFrom->iCursor; |
| 891 | 891 | blob_extract(pFrom, pFrom->nUsed-pFrom->iCursor, pTo); |
| @@ -976,11 +976,11 @@ | ||
| 976 | 976 | ** Options: |
| 977 | 977 | ** -y|--side-by-side Show diff of INPUTFILE and output side-by-side |
| 978 | 978 | ** -W|--width N Width of lines in side-by-side diff |
| 979 | 979 | */ |
| 980 | 980 | void test_strip_comment_lines_cmd(void){ |
| 981 | - Blob f, h; /* unitialized */ | |
| 981 | + Blob f, h; /* uninitialized */ | |
| 982 | 982 | Blob out; |
| 983 | 983 | DiffConfig dCfg; |
| 984 | 984 | int sbs = 0; |
| 985 | 985 | const char *z; |
| 986 | 986 | int w = 0; |
| 987 | 987 |
| --- src/blob.c | |
| +++ src/blob.c | |
| @@ -782,11 +782,11 @@ | |
| 782 | ** end-of-file. |
| 783 | ** |
| 784 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first byte past the |
| 785 | ** \n that terminated the line. |
| 786 | ** |
| 787 | ** pTo will be an ephermeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter |
| 788 | ** pTo as well. |
| 789 | */ |
| 790 | int blob_line(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 791 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 792 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -825,11 +825,11 @@ | |
| 825 | ** whitespace is ignored. |
| 826 | ** |
| 827 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first character past |
| 828 | ** the end of the token. |
| 829 | ** |
| 830 | ** pTo will be an ephermeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter |
| 831 | ** pTo as well. |
| 832 | */ |
| 833 | int blob_token(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 834 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 835 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -853,11 +853,11 @@ | |
| 853 | ** (ignoring double '') or by the end of the string |
| 854 | ** |
| 855 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first character past |
| 856 | ** the end of the token. |
| 857 | ** |
| 858 | ** pTo will be an ephermeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter |
| 859 | ** pTo as well. |
| 860 | */ |
| 861 | int blob_sqltoken(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 862 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 863 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -881,11 +881,11 @@ | |
| 881 | return pTo->nUsed; |
| 882 | } |
| 883 | |
| 884 | /* |
| 885 | ** Extract everything from the current cursor to the end of the blob |
| 886 | ** into a new blob. The new blob is an ephemerial reference to the |
| 887 | ** original blob. The cursor of the original blob is unchanged. |
| 888 | */ |
| 889 | int blob_tail(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 890 | int iCursor = pFrom->iCursor; |
| 891 | blob_extract(pFrom, pFrom->nUsed-pFrom->iCursor, pTo); |
| @@ -976,11 +976,11 @@ | |
| 976 | ** Options: |
| 977 | ** -y|--side-by-side Show diff of INPUTFILE and output side-by-side |
| 978 | ** -W|--width N Width of lines in side-by-side diff |
| 979 | */ |
| 980 | void test_strip_comment_lines_cmd(void){ |
| 981 | Blob f, h; /* unitialized */ |
| 982 | Blob out; |
| 983 | DiffConfig dCfg; |
| 984 | int sbs = 0; |
| 985 | const char *z; |
| 986 | int w = 0; |
| 987 |
| --- src/blob.c | |
| +++ src/blob.c | |
| @@ -782,11 +782,11 @@ | |
| 782 | ** end-of-file. |
| 783 | ** |
| 784 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first byte past the |
| 785 | ** \n that terminated the line. |
| 786 | ** |
| 787 | ** pTo will be an ephemeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter |
| 788 | ** pTo as well. |
| 789 | */ |
| 790 | int blob_line(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 791 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 792 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -825,11 +825,11 @@ | |
| 825 | ** whitespace is ignored. |
| 826 | ** |
| 827 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first character past |
| 828 | ** the end of the token. |
| 829 | ** |
| 830 | ** pTo will be an ephemeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter |
| 831 | ** pTo as well. |
| 832 | */ |
| 833 | int blob_token(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 834 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 835 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -853,11 +853,11 @@ | |
| 853 | ** (ignoring double '') or by the end of the string |
| 854 | ** |
| 855 | ** The cursor of pFrom is left pointing at the first character past |
| 856 | ** the end of the token. |
| 857 | ** |
| 858 | ** pTo will be an ephemeral blob. If pFrom changes, it might alter |
| 859 | ** pTo as well. |
| 860 | */ |
| 861 | int blob_sqltoken(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 862 | char *aData = pFrom->aData; |
| 863 | int n = pFrom->nUsed; |
| @@ -881,11 +881,11 @@ | |
| 881 | return pTo->nUsed; |
| 882 | } |
| 883 | |
| 884 | /* |
| 885 | ** Extract everything from the current cursor to the end of the blob |
| 886 | ** into a new blob. The new blob is an ephemeral reference to the |
| 887 | ** original blob. The cursor of the original blob is unchanged. |
| 888 | */ |
| 889 | int blob_tail(Blob *pFrom, Blob *pTo){ |
| 890 | int iCursor = pFrom->iCursor; |
| 891 | blob_extract(pFrom, pFrom->nUsed-pFrom->iCursor, pTo); |
| @@ -976,11 +976,11 @@ | |
| 976 | ** Options: |
| 977 | ** -y|--side-by-side Show diff of INPUTFILE and output side-by-side |
| 978 | ** -W|--width N Width of lines in side-by-side diff |
| 979 | */ |
| 980 | void test_strip_comment_lines_cmd(void){ |
| 981 | Blob f, h; /* uninitialized */ |
| 982 | Blob out; |
| 983 | DiffConfig dCfg; |
| 984 | int sbs = 0; |
| 985 | const char *z; |
| 986 | int w = 0; |
| 987 |
+7
-7
| --- src/branch.c | ||
| +++ src/branch.c | ||
| @@ -232,11 +232,11 @@ | ||
| 232 | 232 | ** |
| 233 | 233 | ** name Name of the branch |
| 234 | 234 | ** mtime Time of last check-in on this branch |
| 235 | 235 | ** isclosed True if the branch is closed |
| 236 | 236 | ** mergeto Another branch this branch was merged into |
| 237 | -** nckin Number of checkins on this branch | |
| 237 | +** nckin Number of check-ins on this branch | |
| 238 | 238 | ** ckin Hash of the last check-in on this branch |
| 239 | 239 | ** isprivate True if the branch is private |
| 240 | 240 | ** bgclr Background color for this branch |
| 241 | 241 | */ |
| 242 | 242 | static const char createBrlistQuery[] = |
| @@ -558,11 +558,11 @@ | ||
| 558 | 558 | } |
| 559 | 559 | |
| 560 | 560 | /* |
| 561 | 561 | ** Implementation of (branch close|reopen) subcommands. nStartAtArg is |
| 562 | 562 | ** the g.argv index to start reading branch/check-in names. The given |
| 563 | -** checkins are closed if fClose is true, else their "closed" tag (if | |
| 563 | +** check-ins are closed if fClose is true, else their "closed" tag (if | |
| 564 | 564 | ** any) is cancelled. Fails fatally on error. |
| 565 | 565 | */ |
| 566 | 566 | static void branch_cmd_close(int nStartAtArg, int fClose){ |
| 567 | 567 | int argPos = nStartAtArg; /* g.argv pos with first branch name */ |
| 568 | 568 | char * zUuid = 0; /* Resolved branch UUID. */ |
| @@ -1116,17 +1116,17 @@ | ||
| 1116 | 1116 | style_finish_page(); |
| 1117 | 1117 | } |
| 1118 | 1118 | |
| 1119 | 1119 | /* |
| 1120 | 1120 | ** Generate a multichoice submenu for the few recent active branches. zName is |
| 1121 | -** the query parameter used to select the current checkin. zCI is optional and | |
| 1122 | -** represent the currently selected checkin, so if it is a checkin hash | |
| 1121 | +** the query parameter used to select the current check-in. zCI is optional and | |
| 1122 | +** represent the currently selected check-in, so if it is a check-in hash | |
| 1123 | 1123 | ** instead of a branch, it can be part of the multichoice menu. |
| 1124 | 1124 | */ |
| 1125 | 1125 | void generate_branch_submenu_multichoice( |
| 1126 | 1126 | const char* zName, /* Query parameter name */ |
| 1127 | - const char* zCI /* Current checkin */ | |
| 1127 | + const char* zCI /* Current check-in */ | |
| 1128 | 1128 | ){ |
| 1129 | 1129 | Stmt q; |
| 1130 | 1130 | const int brFlags = BRL_ORDERBY_MTIME | BRL_OPEN_ONLY; |
| 1131 | 1131 | static const char *zBranchMenuList[32*2]; /* 2 per entries */ |
| 1132 | 1132 | const int nLimit = count(zBranchMenuList)/2; |
| @@ -1134,18 +1134,18 @@ | ||
| 1134 | 1134 | |
| 1135 | 1135 | if( zName == 0 ) zName = "ci"; |
| 1136 | 1136 | |
| 1137 | 1137 | branch_prepare_list_query(&q, brFlags, 0, nLimit, 0); |
| 1138 | 1138 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = ""; |
| 1139 | - zBranchMenuList[i++] = "All Checkins"; | |
| 1139 | + zBranchMenuList[i++] = "All Check-ins"; | |
| 1140 | 1140 | |
| 1141 | 1141 | if( zCI ){ |
| 1142 | 1142 | zCI = fossil_strdup(zCI); |
| 1143 | 1143 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = zCI; |
| 1144 | 1144 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = zCI; |
| 1145 | 1145 | } |
| 1146 | - /* If current checkin is not "tip", add it to the list */ | |
| 1146 | + /* If current check-in is not "tip", add it to the list */ | |
| 1147 | 1147 | if( zCI==0 || strcmp(zCI, "tip") ){ |
| 1148 | 1148 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = "tip"; |
| 1149 | 1149 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = "tip"; |
| 1150 | 1150 | } |
| 1151 | 1151 | while( i/2 < nLimit && db_step(&q)==SQLITE_ROW ){ |
| 1152 | 1152 |
| --- src/branch.c | |
| +++ src/branch.c | |
| @@ -232,11 +232,11 @@ | |
| 232 | ** |
| 233 | ** name Name of the branch |
| 234 | ** mtime Time of last check-in on this branch |
| 235 | ** isclosed True if the branch is closed |
| 236 | ** mergeto Another branch this branch was merged into |
| 237 | ** nckin Number of checkins on this branch |
| 238 | ** ckin Hash of the last check-in on this branch |
| 239 | ** isprivate True if the branch is private |
| 240 | ** bgclr Background color for this branch |
| 241 | */ |
| 242 | static const char createBrlistQuery[] = |
| @@ -558,11 +558,11 @@ | |
| 558 | } |
| 559 | |
| 560 | /* |
| 561 | ** Implementation of (branch close|reopen) subcommands. nStartAtArg is |
| 562 | ** the g.argv index to start reading branch/check-in names. The given |
| 563 | ** checkins are closed if fClose is true, else their "closed" tag (if |
| 564 | ** any) is cancelled. Fails fatally on error. |
| 565 | */ |
| 566 | static void branch_cmd_close(int nStartAtArg, int fClose){ |
| 567 | int argPos = nStartAtArg; /* g.argv pos with first branch name */ |
| 568 | char * zUuid = 0; /* Resolved branch UUID. */ |
| @@ -1116,17 +1116,17 @@ | |
| 1116 | style_finish_page(); |
| 1117 | } |
| 1118 | |
| 1119 | /* |
| 1120 | ** Generate a multichoice submenu for the few recent active branches. zName is |
| 1121 | ** the query parameter used to select the current checkin. zCI is optional and |
| 1122 | ** represent the currently selected checkin, so if it is a checkin hash |
| 1123 | ** instead of a branch, it can be part of the multichoice menu. |
| 1124 | */ |
| 1125 | void generate_branch_submenu_multichoice( |
| 1126 | const char* zName, /* Query parameter name */ |
| 1127 | const char* zCI /* Current checkin */ |
| 1128 | ){ |
| 1129 | Stmt q; |
| 1130 | const int brFlags = BRL_ORDERBY_MTIME | BRL_OPEN_ONLY; |
| 1131 | static const char *zBranchMenuList[32*2]; /* 2 per entries */ |
| 1132 | const int nLimit = count(zBranchMenuList)/2; |
| @@ -1134,18 +1134,18 @@ | |
| 1134 | |
| 1135 | if( zName == 0 ) zName = "ci"; |
| 1136 | |
| 1137 | branch_prepare_list_query(&q, brFlags, 0, nLimit, 0); |
| 1138 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = ""; |
| 1139 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = "All Checkins"; |
| 1140 | |
| 1141 | if( zCI ){ |
| 1142 | zCI = fossil_strdup(zCI); |
| 1143 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = zCI; |
| 1144 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = zCI; |
| 1145 | } |
| 1146 | /* If current checkin is not "tip", add it to the list */ |
| 1147 | if( zCI==0 || strcmp(zCI, "tip") ){ |
| 1148 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = "tip"; |
| 1149 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = "tip"; |
| 1150 | } |
| 1151 | while( i/2 < nLimit && db_step(&q)==SQLITE_ROW ){ |
| 1152 |
| --- src/branch.c | |
| +++ src/branch.c | |
| @@ -232,11 +232,11 @@ | |
| 232 | ** |
| 233 | ** name Name of the branch |
| 234 | ** mtime Time of last check-in on this branch |
| 235 | ** isclosed True if the branch is closed |
| 236 | ** mergeto Another branch this branch was merged into |
| 237 | ** nckin Number of check-ins on this branch |
| 238 | ** ckin Hash of the last check-in on this branch |
| 239 | ** isprivate True if the branch is private |
| 240 | ** bgclr Background color for this branch |
| 241 | */ |
| 242 | static const char createBrlistQuery[] = |
| @@ -558,11 +558,11 @@ | |
| 558 | } |
| 559 | |
| 560 | /* |
| 561 | ** Implementation of (branch close|reopen) subcommands. nStartAtArg is |
| 562 | ** the g.argv index to start reading branch/check-in names. The given |
| 563 | ** check-ins are closed if fClose is true, else their "closed" tag (if |
| 564 | ** any) is cancelled. Fails fatally on error. |
| 565 | */ |
| 566 | static void branch_cmd_close(int nStartAtArg, int fClose){ |
| 567 | int argPos = nStartAtArg; /* g.argv pos with first branch name */ |
| 568 | char * zUuid = 0; /* Resolved branch UUID. */ |
| @@ -1116,17 +1116,17 @@ | |
| 1116 | style_finish_page(); |
| 1117 | } |
| 1118 | |
| 1119 | /* |
| 1120 | ** Generate a multichoice submenu for the few recent active branches. zName is |
| 1121 | ** the query parameter used to select the current check-in. zCI is optional and |
| 1122 | ** represent the currently selected check-in, so if it is a check-in hash |
| 1123 | ** instead of a branch, it can be part of the multichoice menu. |
| 1124 | */ |
| 1125 | void generate_branch_submenu_multichoice( |
| 1126 | const char* zName, /* Query parameter name */ |
| 1127 | const char* zCI /* Current check-in */ |
| 1128 | ){ |
| 1129 | Stmt q; |
| 1130 | const int brFlags = BRL_ORDERBY_MTIME | BRL_OPEN_ONLY; |
| 1131 | static const char *zBranchMenuList[32*2]; /* 2 per entries */ |
| 1132 | const int nLimit = count(zBranchMenuList)/2; |
| @@ -1134,18 +1134,18 @@ | |
| 1134 | |
| 1135 | if( zName == 0 ) zName = "ci"; |
| 1136 | |
| 1137 | branch_prepare_list_query(&q, brFlags, 0, nLimit, 0); |
| 1138 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = ""; |
| 1139 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = "All Check-ins"; |
| 1140 | |
| 1141 | if( zCI ){ |
| 1142 | zCI = fossil_strdup(zCI); |
| 1143 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = zCI; |
| 1144 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = zCI; |
| 1145 | } |
| 1146 | /* If current check-in is not "tip", add it to the list */ |
| 1147 | if( zCI==0 || strcmp(zCI, "tip") ){ |
| 1148 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = "tip"; |
| 1149 | zBranchMenuList[i++] = "tip"; |
| 1150 | } |
| 1151 | while( i/2 < nLimit && db_step(&q)==SQLITE_ROW ){ |
| 1152 |
+1
-1
| --- src/builtin.c | ||
| +++ src/builtin.c | ||
| @@ -735,11 +735,11 @@ | ||
| 735 | 735 | } fjs[] = { |
| 736 | 736 | /* This list ordering isn't strictly important. */ |
| 737 | 737 | {"confirmer", 0, 0}, |
| 738 | 738 | {"copybutton", 0, "dom\0"}, |
| 739 | 739 | {"diff", 0, "dom\0fetch\0storage\0" |
| 740 | - /* maintenance note: "diff" needs "storage" for storing the the | |
| 740 | + /* maintenance note: "diff" needs "storage" for storing the | |
| 741 | 741 | ** sbs-sync-scroll toggle. */}, |
| 742 | 742 | {"dom", 0, 0}, |
| 743 | 743 | {"fetch", 0, 0}, |
| 744 | 744 | {"numbered-lines", 0, "popupwidget\0copybutton\0"}, |
| 745 | 745 | {"pikchr", 0, "dom\0"}, |
| 746 | 746 |
| --- src/builtin.c | |
| +++ src/builtin.c | |
| @@ -735,11 +735,11 @@ | |
| 735 | } fjs[] = { |
| 736 | /* This list ordering isn't strictly important. */ |
| 737 | {"confirmer", 0, 0}, |
| 738 | {"copybutton", 0, "dom\0"}, |
| 739 | {"diff", 0, "dom\0fetch\0storage\0" |
| 740 | /* maintenance note: "diff" needs "storage" for storing the the |
| 741 | ** sbs-sync-scroll toggle. */}, |
| 742 | {"dom", 0, 0}, |
| 743 | {"fetch", 0, 0}, |
| 744 | {"numbered-lines", 0, "popupwidget\0copybutton\0"}, |
| 745 | {"pikchr", 0, "dom\0"}, |
| 746 |
| --- src/builtin.c | |
| +++ src/builtin.c | |
| @@ -735,11 +735,11 @@ | |
| 735 | } fjs[] = { |
| 736 | /* This list ordering isn't strictly important. */ |
| 737 | {"confirmer", 0, 0}, |
| 738 | {"copybutton", 0, "dom\0"}, |
| 739 | {"diff", 0, "dom\0fetch\0storage\0" |
| 740 | /* maintenance note: "diff" needs "storage" for storing the |
| 741 | ** sbs-sync-scroll toggle. */}, |
| 742 | {"dom", 0, 0}, |
| 743 | {"fetch", 0, 0}, |
| 744 | {"numbered-lines", 0, "popupwidget\0copybutton\0"}, |
| 745 | {"pikchr", 0, "dom\0"}, |
| 746 |
+2
-2
| --- src/cache.c | ||
| +++ src/cache.c | ||
| @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ | ||
| 70 | 70 | "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS blob(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, data BLOB);" |
| 71 | 71 | "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS cache(" |
| 72 | 72 | "key TEXT PRIMARY KEY," /* Key used to access the cache */ |
| 73 | 73 | "id INT REFERENCES blob," /* The cache content */ |
| 74 | 74 | "sz INT," /* Size of content in bytes */ |
| 75 | - "tm INT," /* Last access time (unix timestampe) */ | |
| 75 | + "tm INT," /* Last access time (unix timestamp) */ | |
| 76 | 76 | "nref INT" /* Number of uses */ |
| 77 | 77 | ");" |
| 78 | 78 | "CREATE TRIGGER IF NOT EXISTS cacheDel AFTER DELETE ON cache BEGIN" |
| 79 | 79 | " DELETE FROM blob WHERE id=OLD.id;" |
| 80 | 80 | "END;", |
| @@ -437,11 +437,11 @@ | ||
| 437 | 437 | @ <li><p>%z(href("%R/cacheget?key=%T",zName))%h(zName)</a><br> |
| 438 | 438 | @ size: %,lld(sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt,1)), |
| 439 | 439 | @ hit-count: %d(sqlite3_column_int(pStmt,2)), |
| 440 | 440 | @ last-access: %s(sqlite3_column_text(pStmt,3))Z \ |
| 441 | 441 | if( zHash ){ |
| 442 | - @ → %z(href("%R/timeline?c=%S",zHash))checkin info</a>\ | |
| 442 | + @ → %z(href("%R/timeline?c=%S",zHash))check-in info</a>\ | |
| 443 | 443 | fossil_free(zHash); |
| 444 | 444 | } |
| 445 | 445 | @ </p></li> |
| 446 | 446 | nEntry++; |
| 447 | 447 | } |
| 448 | 448 |
| --- src/cache.c | |
| +++ src/cache.c | |
| @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ | |
| 70 | "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS blob(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, data BLOB);" |
| 71 | "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS cache(" |
| 72 | "key TEXT PRIMARY KEY," /* Key used to access the cache */ |
| 73 | "id INT REFERENCES blob," /* The cache content */ |
| 74 | "sz INT," /* Size of content in bytes */ |
| 75 | "tm INT," /* Last access time (unix timestampe) */ |
| 76 | "nref INT" /* Number of uses */ |
| 77 | ");" |
| 78 | "CREATE TRIGGER IF NOT EXISTS cacheDel AFTER DELETE ON cache BEGIN" |
| 79 | " DELETE FROM blob WHERE id=OLD.id;" |
| 80 | "END;", |
| @@ -437,11 +437,11 @@ | |
| 437 | @ <li><p>%z(href("%R/cacheget?key=%T",zName))%h(zName)</a><br> |
| 438 | @ size: %,lld(sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt,1)), |
| 439 | @ hit-count: %d(sqlite3_column_int(pStmt,2)), |
| 440 | @ last-access: %s(sqlite3_column_text(pStmt,3))Z \ |
| 441 | if( zHash ){ |
| 442 | @ → %z(href("%R/timeline?c=%S",zHash))checkin info</a>\ |
| 443 | fossil_free(zHash); |
| 444 | } |
| 445 | @ </p></li> |
| 446 | nEntry++; |
| 447 | } |
| 448 |
| --- src/cache.c | |
| +++ src/cache.c | |
| @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ | |
| 70 | "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS blob(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, data BLOB);" |
| 71 | "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS cache(" |
| 72 | "key TEXT PRIMARY KEY," /* Key used to access the cache */ |
| 73 | "id INT REFERENCES blob," /* The cache content */ |
| 74 | "sz INT," /* Size of content in bytes */ |
| 75 | "tm INT," /* Last access time (unix timestamp) */ |
| 76 | "nref INT" /* Number of uses */ |
| 77 | ");" |
| 78 | "CREATE TRIGGER IF NOT EXISTS cacheDel AFTER DELETE ON cache BEGIN" |
| 79 | " DELETE FROM blob WHERE id=OLD.id;" |
| 80 | "END;", |
| @@ -437,11 +437,11 @@ | |
| 437 | @ <li><p>%z(href("%R/cacheget?key=%T",zName))%h(zName)</a><br> |
| 438 | @ size: %,lld(sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt,1)), |
| 439 | @ hit-count: %d(sqlite3_column_int(pStmt,2)), |
| 440 | @ last-access: %s(sqlite3_column_text(pStmt,3))Z \ |
| 441 | if( zHash ){ |
| 442 | @ → %z(href("%R/timeline?c=%S",zHash))check-in info</a>\ |
| 443 | fossil_free(zHash); |
| 444 | } |
| 445 | @ </p></li> |
| 446 | nEntry++; |
| 447 | } |
| 448 |
+3
-3
| --- src/captcha.c | ||
| +++ src/captcha.c | ||
| @@ -509,11 +509,11 @@ | ||
| 509 | 509 | sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(x), &x); |
| 510 | 510 | x &= 0x7fffffff; |
| 511 | 511 | return x; |
| 512 | 512 | } |
| 513 | 513 | |
| 514 | -/* The SQL that will rotate the the captcha-secret. */ | |
| 514 | +/* The SQL that will rotate the captcha-secret. */ | |
| 515 | 515 | static const char captchaSecretRotationSql[] = |
| 516 | 516 | @ SAVEPOINT rotate; |
| 517 | 517 | @ DELETE FROM config |
| 518 | 518 | @ WHERE name GLOB 'captcha-secret-*' |
| 519 | 519 | @ AND mtime<unixepoch('now','-6 hours'); |
| @@ -529,11 +529,11 @@ | ||
| 529 | 529 | ; |
| 530 | 530 | |
| 531 | 531 | |
| 532 | 532 | /* |
| 533 | 533 | ** Create a new random captcha-secret. Rotate the old one into |
| 534 | -** the captcha-secret-N backups. Purge captch-secret-N backups | |
| 534 | +** the captcha-secret-N backups. Purge captcha-secret-N backups | |
| 535 | 535 | ** older than 6 hours. |
| 536 | 536 | ** |
| 537 | 537 | ** Do this on the current database and in all other databases of |
| 538 | 538 | ** the same login group. |
| 539 | 539 | */ |
| @@ -559,11 +559,11 @@ | ||
| 559 | 559 | fossil_free(zSql); |
| 560 | 560 | } |
| 561 | 561 | |
| 562 | 562 | /* |
| 563 | 563 | ** Return the value of the N-th more recent captcha-secret. The |
| 564 | -** most recent captch-secret is 0. Others are prior captcha-secrets | |
| 564 | +** most recent captcha-secret is 0. Others are prior captcha-secrets | |
| 565 | 565 | ** that have expired, but are retained for a limited period of time |
| 566 | 566 | ** so that pending anonymous login cookies and/or captcha dialogs |
| 567 | 567 | ** don't malfunction when the captcha-secret changes. |
| 568 | 568 | ** |
| 569 | 569 | ** Clients should start by using the 0-th captcha-secret. Only if |
| 570 | 570 |
| --- src/captcha.c | |
| +++ src/captcha.c | |
| @@ -509,11 +509,11 @@ | |
| 509 | sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(x), &x); |
| 510 | x &= 0x7fffffff; |
| 511 | return x; |
| 512 | } |
| 513 | |
| 514 | /* The SQL that will rotate the the captcha-secret. */ |
| 515 | static const char captchaSecretRotationSql[] = |
| 516 | @ SAVEPOINT rotate; |
| 517 | @ DELETE FROM config |
| 518 | @ WHERE name GLOB 'captcha-secret-*' |
| 519 | @ AND mtime<unixepoch('now','-6 hours'); |
| @@ -529,11 +529,11 @@ | |
| 529 | ; |
| 530 | |
| 531 | |
| 532 | /* |
| 533 | ** Create a new random captcha-secret. Rotate the old one into |
| 534 | ** the captcha-secret-N backups. Purge captch-secret-N backups |
| 535 | ** older than 6 hours. |
| 536 | ** |
| 537 | ** Do this on the current database and in all other databases of |
| 538 | ** the same login group. |
| 539 | */ |
| @@ -559,11 +559,11 @@ | |
| 559 | fossil_free(zSql); |
| 560 | } |
| 561 | |
| 562 | /* |
| 563 | ** Return the value of the N-th more recent captcha-secret. The |
| 564 | ** most recent captch-secret is 0. Others are prior captcha-secrets |
| 565 | ** that have expired, but are retained for a limited period of time |
| 566 | ** so that pending anonymous login cookies and/or captcha dialogs |
| 567 | ** don't malfunction when the captcha-secret changes. |
| 568 | ** |
| 569 | ** Clients should start by using the 0-th captcha-secret. Only if |
| 570 |
| --- src/captcha.c | |
| +++ src/captcha.c | |
| @@ -509,11 +509,11 @@ | |
| 509 | sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(x), &x); |
| 510 | x &= 0x7fffffff; |
| 511 | return x; |
| 512 | } |
| 513 | |
| 514 | /* The SQL that will rotate the captcha-secret. */ |
| 515 | static const char captchaSecretRotationSql[] = |
| 516 | @ SAVEPOINT rotate; |
| 517 | @ DELETE FROM config |
| 518 | @ WHERE name GLOB 'captcha-secret-*' |
| 519 | @ AND mtime<unixepoch('now','-6 hours'); |
| @@ -529,11 +529,11 @@ | |
| 529 | ; |
| 530 | |
| 531 | |
| 532 | /* |
| 533 | ** Create a new random captcha-secret. Rotate the old one into |
| 534 | ** the captcha-secret-N backups. Purge captcha-secret-N backups |
| 535 | ** older than 6 hours. |
| 536 | ** |
| 537 | ** Do this on the current database and in all other databases of |
| 538 | ** the same login group. |
| 539 | */ |
| @@ -559,11 +559,11 @@ | |
| 559 | fossil_free(zSql); |
| 560 | } |
| 561 | |
| 562 | /* |
| 563 | ** Return the value of the N-th more recent captcha-secret. The |
| 564 | ** most recent captcha-secret is 0. Others are prior captcha-secrets |
| 565 | ** that have expired, but are retained for a limited period of time |
| 566 | ** so that pending anonymous login cookies and/or captcha dialogs |
| 567 | ** don't malfunction when the captcha-secret changes. |
| 568 | ** |
| 569 | ** Clients should start by using the 0-th captcha-secret. Only if |
| 570 |
+2
-2
| --- src/cgi.c | ||
| +++ src/cgi.c | ||
| @@ -146,11 +146,11 @@ | ||
| 146 | 146 | ** |
| 147 | 147 | ** Do not confuse the content header with the HTTP header. The content header |
| 148 | 148 | ** is generated by downstream code. The HTTP header is generated by the |
| 149 | 149 | ** cgi_reply() routine below. |
| 150 | 150 | ** |
| 151 | -** The content header and contenty body are *approximately* the <head> | |
| 151 | +** The content header and content body are *approximately* the <head> | |
| 152 | 152 | ** element and the <body> elements for HTML replies. However this is only |
| 153 | 153 | ** approximate. The content header also includes parts of <body> that |
| 154 | 154 | ** show the banner and menu bar at the top of each page. Also note that |
| 155 | 155 | ** not all replies are HTML, but there can still be separate header and |
| 156 | 156 | ** body sections of the content. |
| @@ -2830,11 +2830,11 @@ | ||
| 2830 | 2830 | if( fossil_system(zBrowser)<0 ){ |
| 2831 | 2831 | fossil_warning("cannot start browser: %s\n", zBrowser); |
| 2832 | 2832 | } |
| 2833 | 2833 | } |
| 2834 | 2834 | |
| 2835 | - /* What for incomming requests. For each request, fork() a child process | |
| 2835 | + /* What for incoming requests. For each request, fork() a child process | |
| 2836 | 2836 | ** to deal with that request. The child process returns. The parent |
| 2837 | 2837 | ** keeps on listening and never returns. |
| 2838 | 2838 | */ |
| 2839 | 2839 | while( 1 ){ |
| 2840 | 2840 | #if FOSSIL_MAX_CONNECTIONS>0 |
| 2841 | 2841 |
| --- src/cgi.c | |
| +++ src/cgi.c | |
| @@ -146,11 +146,11 @@ | |
| 146 | ** |
| 147 | ** Do not confuse the content header with the HTTP header. The content header |
| 148 | ** is generated by downstream code. The HTTP header is generated by the |
| 149 | ** cgi_reply() routine below. |
| 150 | ** |
| 151 | ** The content header and contenty body are *approximately* the <head> |
| 152 | ** element and the <body> elements for HTML replies. However this is only |
| 153 | ** approximate. The content header also includes parts of <body> that |
| 154 | ** show the banner and menu bar at the top of each page. Also note that |
| 155 | ** not all replies are HTML, but there can still be separate header and |
| 156 | ** body sections of the content. |
| @@ -2830,11 +2830,11 @@ | |
| 2830 | if( fossil_system(zBrowser)<0 ){ |
| 2831 | fossil_warning("cannot start browser: %s\n", zBrowser); |
| 2832 | } |
| 2833 | } |
| 2834 | |
| 2835 | /* What for incomming requests. For each request, fork() a child process |
| 2836 | ** to deal with that request. The child process returns. The parent |
| 2837 | ** keeps on listening and never returns. |
| 2838 | */ |
| 2839 | while( 1 ){ |
| 2840 | #if FOSSIL_MAX_CONNECTIONS>0 |
| 2841 |
| --- src/cgi.c | |
| +++ src/cgi.c | |
| @@ -146,11 +146,11 @@ | |
| 146 | ** |
| 147 | ** Do not confuse the content header with the HTTP header. The content header |
| 148 | ** is generated by downstream code. The HTTP header is generated by the |
| 149 | ** cgi_reply() routine below. |
| 150 | ** |
| 151 | ** The content header and content body are *approximately* the <head> |
| 152 | ** element and the <body> elements for HTML replies. However this is only |
| 153 | ** approximate. The content header also includes parts of <body> that |
| 154 | ** show the banner and menu bar at the top of each page. Also note that |
| 155 | ** not all replies are HTML, but there can still be separate header and |
| 156 | ** body sections of the content. |
| @@ -2830,11 +2830,11 @@ | |
| 2830 | if( fossil_system(zBrowser)<0 ){ |
| 2831 | fossil_warning("cannot start browser: %s\n", zBrowser); |
| 2832 | } |
| 2833 | } |
| 2834 | |
| 2835 | /* What for incoming requests. For each request, fork() a child process |
| 2836 | ** to deal with that request. The child process returns. The parent |
| 2837 | ** keeps on listening and never returns. |
| 2838 | */ |
| 2839 | while( 1 ){ |
| 2840 | #if FOSSIL_MAX_CONNECTIONS>0 |
| 2841 |
+2
-2
| --- src/checkin.c | ||
| +++ src/checkin.c | ||
| @@ -484,11 +484,11 @@ | ||
| 484 | 484 | {"no-merge", C_MERGE }, {"no-classify", C_CLASSIFY }, |
| 485 | 485 | }; |
| 486 | 486 | |
| 487 | 487 | Blob report = BLOB_INITIALIZER; |
| 488 | 488 | enum {CHANGES, STATUS} command = *g.argv[1]=='s' ? STATUS : CHANGES; |
| 489 | - /* --sha1sum is an undocumented alias for --hash for backwards compatiblity */ | |
| 489 | + /* --sha1sum is an undocumented alias for --hash for backwards compatibility */ | |
| 490 | 490 | int useHash = find_option("hash",0,0)!=0 || find_option("sha1sum",0,0)!=0; |
| 491 | 491 | int showHdr = command==CHANGES && find_option("header", 0, 0); |
| 492 | 492 | int verboseFlag = command==CHANGES && find_option("verbose", "v", 0); |
| 493 | 493 | const char *zIgnoreFlag = find_option("ignore", 0, 1); |
| 494 | 494 | unsigned scanFlags = 0; |
| @@ -2562,11 +2562,11 @@ | ||
| 2562 | 2562 | char *zNewBranch = 0; /* The branch name after update */ |
| 2563 | 2563 | int ckComFlgs; /* Flags passed to verify_comment() */ |
| 2564 | 2564 | |
| 2565 | 2565 | memset(&sCiInfo, 0, sizeof(sCiInfo)); |
| 2566 | 2566 | url_proxy_options(); |
| 2567 | - /* --sha1sum is an undocumented alias for --hash for backwards compatiblity */ | |
| 2567 | + /* --sha1sum is an undocumented alias for --hash for backwards compatibility */ | |
| 2568 | 2568 | useHash = find_option("hash",0,0)!=0 || find_option("sha1sum",0,0)!=0; |
| 2569 | 2569 | noSign = find_option("nosign",0,0)!=0; |
| 2570 | 2570 | if( find_option("nosync",0,0) ) g.fNoSync = 1; |
| 2571 | 2571 | privateFlag = find_option("private",0,0)!=0; |
| 2572 | 2572 | forceDelta = find_option("delta",0,0)!=0; |
| 2573 | 2573 |
| --- src/checkin.c | |
| +++ src/checkin.c | |
| @@ -484,11 +484,11 @@ | |
| 484 | {"no-merge", C_MERGE }, {"no-classify", C_CLASSIFY }, |
| 485 | }; |
| 486 | |
| 487 | Blob report = BLOB_INITIALIZER; |
| 488 | enum {CHANGES, STATUS} command = *g.argv[1]=='s' ? STATUS : CHANGES; |
| 489 | /* --sha1sum is an undocumented alias for --hash for backwards compatiblity */ |
| 490 | int useHash = find_option("hash",0,0)!=0 || find_option("sha1sum",0,0)!=0; |
| 491 | int showHdr = command==CHANGES && find_option("header", 0, 0); |
| 492 | int verboseFlag = command==CHANGES && find_option("verbose", "v", 0); |
| 493 | const char *zIgnoreFlag = find_option("ignore", 0, 1); |
| 494 | unsigned scanFlags = 0; |
| @@ -2562,11 +2562,11 @@ | |
| 2562 | char *zNewBranch = 0; /* The branch name after update */ |
| 2563 | int ckComFlgs; /* Flags passed to verify_comment() */ |
| 2564 | |
| 2565 | memset(&sCiInfo, 0, sizeof(sCiInfo)); |
| 2566 | url_proxy_options(); |
| 2567 | /* --sha1sum is an undocumented alias for --hash for backwards compatiblity */ |
| 2568 | useHash = find_option("hash",0,0)!=0 || find_option("sha1sum",0,0)!=0; |
| 2569 | noSign = find_option("nosign",0,0)!=0; |
| 2570 | if( find_option("nosync",0,0) ) g.fNoSync = 1; |
| 2571 | privateFlag = find_option("private",0,0)!=0; |
| 2572 | forceDelta = find_option("delta",0,0)!=0; |
| 2573 |
| --- src/checkin.c | |
| +++ src/checkin.c | |
| @@ -484,11 +484,11 @@ | |
| 484 | {"no-merge", C_MERGE }, {"no-classify", C_CLASSIFY }, |
| 485 | }; |
| 486 | |
| 487 | Blob report = BLOB_INITIALIZER; |
| 488 | enum {CHANGES, STATUS} command = *g.argv[1]=='s' ? STATUS : CHANGES; |
| 489 | /* --sha1sum is an undocumented alias for --hash for backwards compatibility */ |
| 490 | int useHash = find_option("hash",0,0)!=0 || find_option("sha1sum",0,0)!=0; |
| 491 | int showHdr = command==CHANGES && find_option("header", 0, 0); |
| 492 | int verboseFlag = command==CHANGES && find_option("verbose", "v", 0); |
| 493 | const char *zIgnoreFlag = find_option("ignore", 0, 1); |
| 494 | unsigned scanFlags = 0; |
| @@ -2562,11 +2562,11 @@ | |
| 2562 | char *zNewBranch = 0; /* The branch name after update */ |
| 2563 | int ckComFlgs; /* Flags passed to verify_comment() */ |
| 2564 | |
| 2565 | memset(&sCiInfo, 0, sizeof(sCiInfo)); |
| 2566 | url_proxy_options(); |
| 2567 | /* --sha1sum is an undocumented alias for --hash for backwards compatibility */ |
| 2568 | useHash = find_option("hash",0,0)!=0 || find_option("sha1sum",0,0)!=0; |
| 2569 | noSign = find_option("nosign",0,0)!=0; |
| 2570 | if( find_option("nosync",0,0) ) g.fNoSync = 1; |
| 2571 | privateFlag = find_option("private",0,0)!=0; |
| 2572 | forceDelta = find_option("delta",0,0)!=0; |
| 2573 |
+1
-1
| --- src/color.c | ||
| +++ src/color.c | ||
| @@ -215,11 +215,11 @@ | ||
| 215 | 215 | |
| 216 | 216 | /* |
| 217 | 217 | ** SETTING: raw-bgcolor boolean default=off |
| 218 | 218 | ** |
| 219 | 219 | ** Fossil usually tries to adjust user-specified background colors |
| 220 | -** for checkins so that the text is readable and so that the color | |
| 220 | +** for check-ins so that the text is readable and so that the color | |
| 221 | 221 | ** is not too garish. This setting disables that filter. When |
| 222 | 222 | ** this setting is on, the user-selected background colors are shown |
| 223 | 223 | ** exactly as requested. |
| 224 | 224 | */ |
| 225 | 225 | |
| 226 | 226 |
| --- src/color.c | |
| +++ src/color.c | |
| @@ -215,11 +215,11 @@ | |
| 215 | |
| 216 | /* |
| 217 | ** SETTING: raw-bgcolor boolean default=off |
| 218 | ** |
| 219 | ** Fossil usually tries to adjust user-specified background colors |
| 220 | ** for checkins so that the text is readable and so that the color |
| 221 | ** is not too garish. This setting disables that filter. When |
| 222 | ** this setting is on, the user-selected background colors are shown |
| 223 | ** exactly as requested. |
| 224 | */ |
| 225 | |
| 226 |
| --- src/color.c | |
| +++ src/color.c | |
| @@ -215,11 +215,11 @@ | |
| 215 | |
| 216 | /* |
| 217 | ** SETTING: raw-bgcolor boolean default=off |
| 218 | ** |
| 219 | ** Fossil usually tries to adjust user-specified background colors |
| 220 | ** for check-ins so that the text is readable and so that the color |
| 221 | ** is not too garish. This setting disables that filter. When |
| 222 | ** this setting is on, the user-selected background colors are shown |
| 223 | ** exactly as requested. |
| 224 | */ |
| 225 | |
| 226 |
+1
-1
| --- src/comformat.c | ||
| +++ src/comformat.c | ||
| @@ -750,11 +750,11 @@ | ||
| 750 | 750 | ** handling the value of a C-card from a manifest. |
| 751 | 751 | ** --file FILE Omit the TEXT argument and read the comment text |
| 752 | 752 | ** from FILE. |
| 753 | 753 | ** --indent Number of spaces to indent (default (-1) is to |
| 754 | 754 | ** auto-detect). Zero means no indent. |
| 755 | -** --orig FILE Take the value for the ORIGTEXT argumetn from FILE. | |
| 755 | +** --orig FILE Take the value for the ORIGTEXT argument from FILE. | |
| 756 | 756 | ** --origbreak Attempt to break when the original comment text |
| 757 | 757 | ** is detected. |
| 758 | 758 | ** --trimcrlf Enable trimming of leading/trailing CR/LF. |
| 759 | 759 | ** --trimspace Enable trimming of leading/trailing spaces. |
| 760 | 760 | ** --whitespace Keep all internal whitespace. |
| 761 | 761 |
| --- src/comformat.c | |
| +++ src/comformat.c | |
| @@ -750,11 +750,11 @@ | |
| 750 | ** handling the value of a C-card from a manifest. |
| 751 | ** --file FILE Omit the TEXT argument and read the comment text |
| 752 | ** from FILE. |
| 753 | ** --indent Number of spaces to indent (default (-1) is to |
| 754 | ** auto-detect). Zero means no indent. |
| 755 | ** --orig FILE Take the value for the ORIGTEXT argumetn from FILE. |
| 756 | ** --origbreak Attempt to break when the original comment text |
| 757 | ** is detected. |
| 758 | ** --trimcrlf Enable trimming of leading/trailing CR/LF. |
| 759 | ** --trimspace Enable trimming of leading/trailing spaces. |
| 760 | ** --whitespace Keep all internal whitespace. |
| 761 |
| --- src/comformat.c | |
| +++ src/comformat.c | |
| @@ -750,11 +750,11 @@ | |
| 750 | ** handling the value of a C-card from a manifest. |
| 751 | ** --file FILE Omit the TEXT argument and read the comment text |
| 752 | ** from FILE. |
| 753 | ** --indent Number of spaces to indent (default (-1) is to |
| 754 | ** auto-detect). Zero means no indent. |
| 755 | ** --orig FILE Take the value for the ORIGTEXT argument from FILE. |
| 756 | ** --origbreak Attempt to break when the original comment text |
| 757 | ** is detected. |
| 758 | ** --trimcrlf Enable trimming of leading/trailing CR/LF. |
| 759 | ** --trimspace Enable trimming of leading/trailing spaces. |
| 760 | ** --whitespace Keep all internal whitespace. |
| 761 |
+1
-1
| --- src/config.h | ||
| +++ src/config.h | ||
| @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ | ||
| 39 | 39 | |
| 40 | 40 | #ifdef HAVE_AUTOCONFIG_H |
| 41 | 41 | #include "autoconfig.h" |
| 42 | 42 | #endif |
| 43 | 43 | |
| 44 | -/* Enable the hardened SHA1 implemenation by default */ | |
| 44 | +/* Enable the hardened SHA1 implementation by default */ | |
| 45 | 45 | #ifndef FOSSIL_HARDENED_SHA1 |
| 46 | 46 | # define FOSSIL_HARDENED_SHA1 1 |
| 47 | 47 | #endif |
| 48 | 48 | |
| 49 | 49 | #ifndef _RC_COMPILE_ |
| 50 | 50 |
| --- src/config.h | |
| +++ src/config.h | |
| @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ | |
| 39 | |
| 40 | #ifdef HAVE_AUTOCONFIG_H |
| 41 | #include "autoconfig.h" |
| 42 | #endif |
| 43 | |
| 44 | /* Enable the hardened SHA1 implemenation by default */ |
| 45 | #ifndef FOSSIL_HARDENED_SHA1 |
| 46 | # define FOSSIL_HARDENED_SHA1 1 |
| 47 | #endif |
| 48 | |
| 49 | #ifndef _RC_COMPILE_ |
| 50 |
| --- src/config.h | |
| +++ src/config.h | |
| @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ | |
| 39 | |
| 40 | #ifdef HAVE_AUTOCONFIG_H |
| 41 | #include "autoconfig.h" |
| 42 | #endif |
| 43 | |
| 44 | /* Enable the hardened SHA1 implementation by default */ |
| 45 | #ifndef FOSSIL_HARDENED_SHA1 |
| 46 | # define FOSSIL_HARDENED_SHA1 1 |
| 47 | #endif |
| 48 | |
| 49 | #ifndef _RC_COMPILE_ |
| 50 |
+1
-1
| --- src/configure.c | ||
| +++ src/configure.c | ||
| @@ -376,11 +376,11 @@ | ||
| 376 | 376 | ** NAME-specific notes: |
| 377 | 377 | ** |
| 378 | 378 | ** - /reportftm's $MTIME is in Julian, not the Unix epoch. |
| 379 | 379 | */ |
| 380 | 380 | void configure_receive(const char *zName, Blob *pContent, int groupMask){ |
| 381 | - int checkMask; /* Masks for which we must first check existance of tables */ | |
| 381 | + int checkMask; /* Masks for which we must first check existence of tables */ | |
| 382 | 382 | |
| 383 | 383 | checkMask = CONFIGSET_SCRIBER; |
| 384 | 384 | if( zName[0]=='/' ){ |
| 385 | 385 | /* The new format */ |
| 386 | 386 | char *azToken[24]; |
| 387 | 387 |
| --- src/configure.c | |
| +++ src/configure.c | |
| @@ -376,11 +376,11 @@ | |
| 376 | ** NAME-specific notes: |
| 377 | ** |
| 378 | ** - /reportftm's $MTIME is in Julian, not the Unix epoch. |
| 379 | */ |
| 380 | void configure_receive(const char *zName, Blob *pContent, int groupMask){ |
| 381 | int checkMask; /* Masks for which we must first check existance of tables */ |
| 382 | |
| 383 | checkMask = CONFIGSET_SCRIBER; |
| 384 | if( zName[0]=='/' ){ |
| 385 | /* The new format */ |
| 386 | char *azToken[24]; |
| 387 |
| --- src/configure.c | |
| +++ src/configure.c | |
| @@ -376,11 +376,11 @@ | |
| 376 | ** NAME-specific notes: |
| 377 | ** |
| 378 | ** - /reportftm's $MTIME is in Julian, not the Unix epoch. |
| 379 | */ |
| 380 | void configure_receive(const char *zName, Blob *pContent, int groupMask){ |
| 381 | int checkMask; /* Masks for which we must first check existence of tables */ |
| 382 | |
| 383 | checkMask = CONFIGSET_SCRIBER; |
| 384 | if( zName[0]=='/' ){ |
| 385 | /* The new format */ |
| 386 | char *azToken[24]; |
| 387 |
+2
-2
| --- src/content.c | ||
| +++ src/content.c | ||
| @@ -496,11 +496,11 @@ | ||
| 496 | 496 | ** zUuid is the UUID of the artifact, if it is specified. When srcId is |
| 497 | 497 | ** specified then zUuid must always be specified. If srcId is zero, |
| 498 | 498 | ** and zUuid is zero then the correct zUuid is computed from pBlob. |
| 499 | 499 | ** |
| 500 | 500 | ** If the record already exists but is a phantom, the pBlob content |
| 501 | -** is inserted and the phatom becomes a real record. | |
| 501 | +** is inserted and the phantom becomes a real record. | |
| 502 | 502 | ** |
| 503 | 503 | ** The original content of pBlob is not disturbed. The caller continues |
| 504 | 504 | ** to be responsible for pBlob. This routine does *not* take over |
| 505 | 505 | ** responsibility for freeing pBlob. |
| 506 | 506 | */ |
| @@ -793,11 +793,11 @@ | ||
| 793 | 793 | } |
| 794 | 794 | |
| 795 | 795 | /* |
| 796 | 796 | ** Try to change the storage of rid so that it is a delta from one |
| 797 | 797 | ** of the artifacts given in aSrc[0]..aSrc[nSrc-1]. The aSrc[*] that |
| 798 | -** gives the smallest delta is choosen. | |
| 798 | +** gives the smallest delta is chosen. | |
| 799 | 799 | ** |
| 800 | 800 | ** If rid is already a delta from some other place then no |
| 801 | 801 | ** conversion occurs and this is a no-op unless force==1. If force==1, |
| 802 | 802 | ** then nSrc must also be 1. |
| 803 | 803 | ** |
| 804 | 804 |
| --- src/content.c | |
| +++ src/content.c | |
| @@ -496,11 +496,11 @@ | |
| 496 | ** zUuid is the UUID of the artifact, if it is specified. When srcId is |
| 497 | ** specified then zUuid must always be specified. If srcId is zero, |
| 498 | ** and zUuid is zero then the correct zUuid is computed from pBlob. |
| 499 | ** |
| 500 | ** If the record already exists but is a phantom, the pBlob content |
| 501 | ** is inserted and the phatom becomes a real record. |
| 502 | ** |
| 503 | ** The original content of pBlob is not disturbed. The caller continues |
| 504 | ** to be responsible for pBlob. This routine does *not* take over |
| 505 | ** responsibility for freeing pBlob. |
| 506 | */ |
| @@ -793,11 +793,11 @@ | |
| 793 | } |
| 794 | |
| 795 | /* |
| 796 | ** Try to change the storage of rid so that it is a delta from one |
| 797 | ** of the artifacts given in aSrc[0]..aSrc[nSrc-1]. The aSrc[*] that |
| 798 | ** gives the smallest delta is choosen. |
| 799 | ** |
| 800 | ** If rid is already a delta from some other place then no |
| 801 | ** conversion occurs and this is a no-op unless force==1. If force==1, |
| 802 | ** then nSrc must also be 1. |
| 803 | ** |
| 804 |
| --- src/content.c | |
| +++ src/content.c | |
| @@ -496,11 +496,11 @@ | |
| 496 | ** zUuid is the UUID of the artifact, if it is specified. When srcId is |
| 497 | ** specified then zUuid must always be specified. If srcId is zero, |
| 498 | ** and zUuid is zero then the correct zUuid is computed from pBlob. |
| 499 | ** |
| 500 | ** If the record already exists but is a phantom, the pBlob content |
| 501 | ** is inserted and the phantom becomes a real record. |
| 502 | ** |
| 503 | ** The original content of pBlob is not disturbed. The caller continues |
| 504 | ** to be responsible for pBlob. This routine does *not* take over |
| 505 | ** responsibility for freeing pBlob. |
| 506 | */ |
| @@ -793,11 +793,11 @@ | |
| 793 | } |
| 794 | |
| 795 | /* |
| 796 | ** Try to change the storage of rid so that it is a delta from one |
| 797 | ** of the artifacts given in aSrc[0]..aSrc[nSrc-1]. The aSrc[*] that |
| 798 | ** gives the smallest delta is chosen. |
| 799 | ** |
| 800 | ** If rid is already a delta from some other place then no |
| 801 | ** conversion occurs and this is a no-op unless force==1. If force==1, |
| 802 | ** then nSrc must also be 1. |
| 803 | ** |
| 804 |
M
src/db.c
+6
-6
| --- src/db.c | ||
| +++ src/db.c | ||
| @@ -1718,11 +1718,11 @@ | ||
| 1718 | 1718 | savedKeySize = n; |
| 1719 | 1719 | } |
| 1720 | 1720 | |
| 1721 | 1721 | /* |
| 1722 | 1722 | ** This function arranges for the database encryption key to be securely |
| 1723 | -** saved in non-pagable memory (on platforms where this is possible). | |
| 1723 | +** saved in non-pageable memory (on platforms where this is possible). | |
| 1724 | 1724 | */ |
| 1725 | 1725 | static void db_save_encryption_key( |
| 1726 | 1726 | Blob *pKey |
| 1727 | 1727 | ){ |
| 1728 | 1728 | void *p = NULL; |
| @@ -2531,11 +2531,11 @@ | ||
| 2531 | 2531 | if( file_access(zDbName, F_OK) ) return 0; |
| 2532 | 2532 | lsize = file_size(zDbName, ExtFILE); |
| 2533 | 2533 | if( lsize%1024!=0 || lsize<4096 ) return 0; |
| 2534 | 2534 | db_open_or_attach(zDbName, "localdb"); |
| 2535 | 2535 | |
| 2536 | - /* Check to see if the check-out database has the lastest schema changes. | |
| 2536 | + /* Check to see if the check-out database has the latest schema changes. | |
| 2537 | 2537 | ** The most recent schema change (2019-01-19) is the addition of the |
| 2538 | 2538 | ** vmerge.mhash and vfile.mhash fields. If the schema has the vmerge.mhash |
| 2539 | 2539 | ** column, assume everything else is up-to-date. |
| 2540 | 2540 | */ |
| 2541 | 2541 | if( db_table_has_column("localdb","vmerge","mhash") ){ |
| @@ -2784,11 +2784,11 @@ | ||
| 2784 | 2784 | |
| 2785 | 2785 | /* Additional checks that occur when opening the check-out database */ |
| 2786 | 2786 | if( g.localOpen ){ |
| 2787 | 2787 | |
| 2788 | 2788 | /* If the repository database that was just opened has been |
| 2789 | - ** eplaced by a clone of the same project, with different RID | |
| 2789 | + ** replaced by a clone of the same project, with different RID | |
| 2790 | 2790 | ** values, then renumber the RID values stored in various tables |
| 2791 | 2791 | ** of the check-out database, so that the repository and check-out |
| 2792 | 2792 | ** databases align. |
| 2793 | 2793 | */ |
| 2794 | 2794 | if( !db_fingerprint_ok() ){ |
| @@ -3655,12 +3655,12 @@ | ||
| 3655 | 3655 | ** non-versioned value exist and are not equal, then a warning message |
| 3656 | 3656 | ** might be generated. |
| 3657 | 3657 | ** |
| 3658 | 3658 | ** zCkin is normally NULL. In that case, the versioned setting is |
| 3659 | 3659 | ** take from the local check-out, if a local checkout exists, or from |
| 3660 | -** checkin named by the g.zOpenRevision global variable. If zCkin is | |
| 3661 | -** not NULL, then zCkin is the name of the specific checkin from which | |
| 3660 | +** check-in named by the g.zOpenRevision global variable. If zCkin is | |
| 3661 | +** not NULL, then zCkin is the name of the specific check-in from which | |
| 3662 | 3662 | ** versioned setting value is taken. When zCkin is not NULL, the cache |
| 3663 | 3663 | ** is bypassed. |
| 3664 | 3664 | */ |
| 3665 | 3665 | char *db_get_versioned( |
| 3666 | 3666 | const char *zName, |
| @@ -4855,11 +4855,11 @@ | ||
| 4855 | 4855 | */ |
| 4856 | 4856 | /* |
| 4857 | 4857 | ** SETTING: empty-dirs width=40 versionable block-text |
| 4858 | 4858 | ** The value is a list of pathnames parsed according to the same rules as |
| 4859 | 4859 | ** the *-glob settings. On update and checkout commands, if no directory |
| 4860 | -** exists with that name, an empty directory will be be created, even if | |
| 4860 | +** exists with that name, an empty directory will be created, even if | |
| 4861 | 4861 | ** it must create one or more parent directories. |
| 4862 | 4862 | */ |
| 4863 | 4863 | /* |
| 4864 | 4864 | ** SETTING: encoding-glob width=40 versionable block-text |
| 4865 | 4865 | ** The VALUE of this setting is a list of GLOB patterns matching files that |
| 4866 | 4866 |
| --- src/db.c | |
| +++ src/db.c | |
| @@ -1718,11 +1718,11 @@ | |
| 1718 | savedKeySize = n; |
| 1719 | } |
| 1720 | |
| 1721 | /* |
| 1722 | ** This function arranges for the database encryption key to be securely |
| 1723 | ** saved in non-pagable memory (on platforms where this is possible). |
| 1724 | */ |
| 1725 | static void db_save_encryption_key( |
| 1726 | Blob *pKey |
| 1727 | ){ |
| 1728 | void *p = NULL; |
| @@ -2531,11 +2531,11 @@ | |
| 2531 | if( file_access(zDbName, F_OK) ) return 0; |
| 2532 | lsize = file_size(zDbName, ExtFILE); |
| 2533 | if( lsize%1024!=0 || lsize<4096 ) return 0; |
| 2534 | db_open_or_attach(zDbName, "localdb"); |
| 2535 | |
| 2536 | /* Check to see if the check-out database has the lastest schema changes. |
| 2537 | ** The most recent schema change (2019-01-19) is the addition of the |
| 2538 | ** vmerge.mhash and vfile.mhash fields. If the schema has the vmerge.mhash |
| 2539 | ** column, assume everything else is up-to-date. |
| 2540 | */ |
| 2541 | if( db_table_has_column("localdb","vmerge","mhash") ){ |
| @@ -2784,11 +2784,11 @@ | |
| 2784 | |
| 2785 | /* Additional checks that occur when opening the check-out database */ |
| 2786 | if( g.localOpen ){ |
| 2787 | |
| 2788 | /* If the repository database that was just opened has been |
| 2789 | ** eplaced by a clone of the same project, with different RID |
| 2790 | ** values, then renumber the RID values stored in various tables |
| 2791 | ** of the check-out database, so that the repository and check-out |
| 2792 | ** databases align. |
| 2793 | */ |
| 2794 | if( !db_fingerprint_ok() ){ |
| @@ -3655,12 +3655,12 @@ | |
| 3655 | ** non-versioned value exist and are not equal, then a warning message |
| 3656 | ** might be generated. |
| 3657 | ** |
| 3658 | ** zCkin is normally NULL. In that case, the versioned setting is |
| 3659 | ** take from the local check-out, if a local checkout exists, or from |
| 3660 | ** checkin named by the g.zOpenRevision global variable. If zCkin is |
| 3661 | ** not NULL, then zCkin is the name of the specific checkin from which |
| 3662 | ** versioned setting value is taken. When zCkin is not NULL, the cache |
| 3663 | ** is bypassed. |
| 3664 | */ |
| 3665 | char *db_get_versioned( |
| 3666 | const char *zName, |
| @@ -4855,11 +4855,11 @@ | |
| 4855 | */ |
| 4856 | /* |
| 4857 | ** SETTING: empty-dirs width=40 versionable block-text |
| 4858 | ** The value is a list of pathnames parsed according to the same rules as |
| 4859 | ** the *-glob settings. On update and checkout commands, if no directory |
| 4860 | ** exists with that name, an empty directory will be be created, even if |
| 4861 | ** it must create one or more parent directories. |
| 4862 | */ |
| 4863 | /* |
| 4864 | ** SETTING: encoding-glob width=40 versionable block-text |
| 4865 | ** The VALUE of this setting is a list of GLOB patterns matching files that |
| 4866 |
| --- src/db.c | |
| +++ src/db.c | |
| @@ -1718,11 +1718,11 @@ | |
| 1718 | savedKeySize = n; |
| 1719 | } |
| 1720 | |
| 1721 | /* |
| 1722 | ** This function arranges for the database encryption key to be securely |
| 1723 | ** saved in non-pageable memory (on platforms where this is possible). |
| 1724 | */ |
| 1725 | static void db_save_encryption_key( |
| 1726 | Blob *pKey |
| 1727 | ){ |
| 1728 | void *p = NULL; |
| @@ -2531,11 +2531,11 @@ | |
| 2531 | if( file_access(zDbName, F_OK) ) return 0; |
| 2532 | lsize = file_size(zDbName, ExtFILE); |
| 2533 | if( lsize%1024!=0 || lsize<4096 ) return 0; |
| 2534 | db_open_or_attach(zDbName, "localdb"); |
| 2535 | |
| 2536 | /* Check to see if the check-out database has the latest schema changes. |
| 2537 | ** The most recent schema change (2019-01-19) is the addition of the |
| 2538 | ** vmerge.mhash and vfile.mhash fields. If the schema has the vmerge.mhash |
| 2539 | ** column, assume everything else is up-to-date. |
| 2540 | */ |
| 2541 | if( db_table_has_column("localdb","vmerge","mhash") ){ |
| @@ -2784,11 +2784,11 @@ | |
| 2784 | |
| 2785 | /* Additional checks that occur when opening the check-out database */ |
| 2786 | if( g.localOpen ){ |
| 2787 | |
| 2788 | /* If the repository database that was just opened has been |
| 2789 | ** replaced by a clone of the same project, with different RID |
| 2790 | ** values, then renumber the RID values stored in various tables |
| 2791 | ** of the check-out database, so that the repository and check-out |
| 2792 | ** databases align. |
| 2793 | */ |
| 2794 | if( !db_fingerprint_ok() ){ |
| @@ -3655,12 +3655,12 @@ | |
| 3655 | ** non-versioned value exist and are not equal, then a warning message |
| 3656 | ** might be generated. |
| 3657 | ** |
| 3658 | ** zCkin is normally NULL. In that case, the versioned setting is |
| 3659 | ** take from the local check-out, if a local checkout exists, or from |
| 3660 | ** check-in named by the g.zOpenRevision global variable. If zCkin is |
| 3661 | ** not NULL, then zCkin is the name of the specific check-in from which |
| 3662 | ** versioned setting value is taken. When zCkin is not NULL, the cache |
| 3663 | ** is bypassed. |
| 3664 | */ |
| 3665 | char *db_get_versioned( |
| 3666 | const char *zName, |
| @@ -4855,11 +4855,11 @@ | |
| 4855 | */ |
| 4856 | /* |
| 4857 | ** SETTING: empty-dirs width=40 versionable block-text |
| 4858 | ** The value is a list of pathnames parsed according to the same rules as |
| 4859 | ** the *-glob settings. On update and checkout commands, if no directory |
| 4860 | ** exists with that name, an empty directory will be created, even if |
| 4861 | ** it must create one or more parent directories. |
| 4862 | */ |
| 4863 | /* |
| 4864 | ** SETTING: encoding-glob width=40 versionable block-text |
| 4865 | ** The VALUE of this setting is a list of GLOB patterns matching files that |
| 4866 |
+1
-1
| --- src/delta.c | ||
| +++ src/delta.c | ||
| @@ -316,11 +316,11 @@ | ||
| 316 | 316 | ** |
| 317 | 317 | ** The last term is of the form |
| 318 | 318 | ** |
| 319 | 319 | ** NNN; |
| 320 | 320 | ** |
| 321 | -** In this case, NNN is a 32-bit bigendian checksum of the output file | |
| 321 | +** In this case, NNN is a 32-bit big endian checksum of the output file | |
| 322 | 322 | ** that can be used to verify that the delta applied correctly. All |
| 323 | 323 | ** numbers are in base-64. |
| 324 | 324 | ** |
| 325 | 325 | ** Pure text files generate a pure text delta. Binary files generate a |
| 326 | 326 | ** delta that may contain some binary data. |
| 327 | 327 |
| --- src/delta.c | |
| +++ src/delta.c | |
| @@ -316,11 +316,11 @@ | |
| 316 | ** |
| 317 | ** The last term is of the form |
| 318 | ** |
| 319 | ** NNN; |
| 320 | ** |
| 321 | ** In this case, NNN is a 32-bit bigendian checksum of the output file |
| 322 | ** that can be used to verify that the delta applied correctly. All |
| 323 | ** numbers are in base-64. |
| 324 | ** |
| 325 | ** Pure text files generate a pure text delta. Binary files generate a |
| 326 | ** delta that may contain some binary data. |
| 327 |
| --- src/delta.c | |
| +++ src/delta.c | |
| @@ -316,11 +316,11 @@ | |
| 316 | ** |
| 317 | ** The last term is of the form |
| 318 | ** |
| 319 | ** NNN; |
| 320 | ** |
| 321 | ** In this case, NNN is a 32-bit big endian checksum of the output file |
| 322 | ** that can be used to verify that the delta applied correctly. All |
| 323 | ** numbers are in base-64. |
| 324 | ** |
| 325 | ** Pure text files generate a pure text delta. Binary files generate a |
| 326 | ** delta that may contain some binary data. |
| 327 |
+1
-1
| --- src/descendants.c | ||
| +++ src/descendants.c | ||
| @@ -159,11 +159,11 @@ | ||
| 159 | 159 | } |
| 160 | 160 | } |
| 161 | 161 | |
| 162 | 162 | /* |
| 163 | 163 | ** If RID refers to a check-in, return the mtime of that check-in - the |
| 164 | -** julian day number of when the check-in occurred. | |
| 164 | +** Julian day number of when the check-in occurred. | |
| 165 | 165 | */ |
| 166 | 166 | double mtime_of_rid(int rid, double mtime){ |
| 167 | 167 | static Stmt q; |
| 168 | 168 | db_static_prepare(&q,"SELECT mtime FROM event WHERE objid=:rid"); |
| 169 | 169 | db_bind_int(&q, ":rid", rid); |
| 170 | 170 |
| --- src/descendants.c | |
| +++ src/descendants.c | |
| @@ -159,11 +159,11 @@ | |
| 159 | } |
| 160 | } |
| 161 | |
| 162 | /* |
| 163 | ** If RID refers to a check-in, return the mtime of that check-in - the |
| 164 | ** julian day number of when the check-in occurred. |
| 165 | */ |
| 166 | double mtime_of_rid(int rid, double mtime){ |
| 167 | static Stmt q; |
| 168 | db_static_prepare(&q,"SELECT mtime FROM event WHERE objid=:rid"); |
| 169 | db_bind_int(&q, ":rid", rid); |
| 170 |
| --- src/descendants.c | |
| +++ src/descendants.c | |
| @@ -159,11 +159,11 @@ | |
| 159 | } |
| 160 | } |
| 161 | |
| 162 | /* |
| 163 | ** If RID refers to a check-in, return the mtime of that check-in - the |
| 164 | ** Julian day number of when the check-in occurred. |
| 165 | */ |
| 166 | double mtime_of_rid(int rid, double mtime){ |
| 167 | static Stmt q; |
| 168 | db_static_prepare(&q,"SELECT mtime FROM event WHERE objid=:rid"); |
| 169 | db_bind_int(&q, ":rid", rid); |
| 170 |
+1
-1
| --- src/diff.c | ||
| +++ src/diff.c | ||
| @@ -1045,11 +1045,11 @@ | ||
| 1045 | 1045 | |
| 1046 | 1046 | /************************* DiffBuilderDebug ********************************/ |
| 1047 | 1047 | /* This version of DiffBuilder is used for debugging the diff and diff |
| 1048 | 1048 | ** diff formatter logic. It is accessed using the (undocumented) --debug |
| 1049 | 1049 | ** option to the diff command. The output is human-readable text that |
| 1050 | -** describes the various method calls that are invoked agains the DiffBuilder | |
| 1050 | +** describes the various method calls that are invoked against the DiffBuilder | |
| 1051 | 1051 | ** object. |
| 1052 | 1052 | */ |
| 1053 | 1053 | static void dfdebugSkip(DiffBuilder *p, unsigned int n, int isFinal){ |
| 1054 | 1054 | blob_appendf(p->pOut, "SKIP %d (%d..%d left and %d..%d right)%s\n", |
| 1055 | 1055 | n, p->lnLeft+1, p->lnLeft+n, p->lnRight+1, p->lnRight+n, |
| 1056 | 1056 |
| --- src/diff.c | |
| +++ src/diff.c | |
| @@ -1045,11 +1045,11 @@ | |
| 1045 | |
| 1046 | /************************* DiffBuilderDebug ********************************/ |
| 1047 | /* This version of DiffBuilder is used for debugging the diff and diff |
| 1048 | ** diff formatter logic. It is accessed using the (undocumented) --debug |
| 1049 | ** option to the diff command. The output is human-readable text that |
| 1050 | ** describes the various method calls that are invoked agains the DiffBuilder |
| 1051 | ** object. |
| 1052 | */ |
| 1053 | static void dfdebugSkip(DiffBuilder *p, unsigned int n, int isFinal){ |
| 1054 | blob_appendf(p->pOut, "SKIP %d (%d..%d left and %d..%d right)%s\n", |
| 1055 | n, p->lnLeft+1, p->lnLeft+n, p->lnRight+1, p->lnRight+n, |
| 1056 |
| --- src/diff.c | |
| +++ src/diff.c | |
| @@ -1045,11 +1045,11 @@ | |
| 1045 | |
| 1046 | /************************* DiffBuilderDebug ********************************/ |
| 1047 | /* This version of DiffBuilder is used for debugging the diff and diff |
| 1048 | ** diff formatter logic. It is accessed using the (undocumented) --debug |
| 1049 | ** option to the diff command. The output is human-readable text that |
| 1050 | ** describes the various method calls that are invoked against the DiffBuilder |
| 1051 | ** object. |
| 1052 | */ |
| 1053 | static void dfdebugSkip(DiffBuilder *p, unsigned int n, int isFinal){ |
| 1054 | blob_appendf(p->pOut, "SKIP %d (%d..%d left and %d..%d right)%s\n", |
| 1055 | n, p->lnLeft+1, p->lnLeft+n, p->lnRight+1, p->lnRight+n, |
| 1056 |
+1
-1
| --- src/diffcmd.c | ||
| +++ src/diffcmd.c | ||
| @@ -813,11 +813,11 @@ | ||
| 813 | 813 | Blob *pOut /* Blob to output diff instead of stdout */ |
| 814 | 814 | ){ |
| 815 | 815 | int vid; |
| 816 | 816 | Blob sql; |
| 817 | 817 | Stmt q; |
| 818 | - int asNewFile; /* Treat non-existant files as empty files */ | |
| 818 | + int asNewFile; /* Treat non-existent files as empty files */ | |
| 819 | 819 | int isNumStat; /* True for --numstat */ |
| 820 | 820 | |
| 821 | 821 | asNewFile = (pCfg->diffFlags & (DIFF_VERBOSE|DIFF_NUMSTAT|DIFF_HTML))!=0; |
| 822 | 822 | isNumStat = (pCfg->diffFlags & (DIFF_NUMSTAT|DIFF_TCL|DIFF_HTML))!=0; |
| 823 | 823 | vid = db_lget_int("checkout", 0); |
| 824 | 824 |
| --- src/diffcmd.c | |
| +++ src/diffcmd.c | |
| @@ -813,11 +813,11 @@ | |
| 813 | Blob *pOut /* Blob to output diff instead of stdout */ |
| 814 | ){ |
| 815 | int vid; |
| 816 | Blob sql; |
| 817 | Stmt q; |
| 818 | int asNewFile; /* Treat non-existant files as empty files */ |
| 819 | int isNumStat; /* True for --numstat */ |
| 820 | |
| 821 | asNewFile = (pCfg->diffFlags & (DIFF_VERBOSE|DIFF_NUMSTAT|DIFF_HTML))!=0; |
| 822 | isNumStat = (pCfg->diffFlags & (DIFF_NUMSTAT|DIFF_TCL|DIFF_HTML))!=0; |
| 823 | vid = db_lget_int("checkout", 0); |
| 824 |
| --- src/diffcmd.c | |
| +++ src/diffcmd.c | |
| @@ -813,11 +813,11 @@ | |
| 813 | Blob *pOut /* Blob to output diff instead of stdout */ |
| 814 | ){ |
| 815 | int vid; |
| 816 | Blob sql; |
| 817 | Stmt q; |
| 818 | int asNewFile; /* Treat non-existent files as empty files */ |
| 819 | int isNumStat; /* True for --numstat */ |
| 820 | |
| 821 | asNewFile = (pCfg->diffFlags & (DIFF_VERBOSE|DIFF_NUMSTAT|DIFF_HTML))!=0; |
| 822 | isNumStat = (pCfg->diffFlags & (DIFF_NUMSTAT|DIFF_TCL|DIFF_HTML))!=0; |
| 823 | vid = db_lget_int("checkout", 0); |
| 824 |
+1
-1
| --- src/dispatch.c | ||
| +++ src/dispatch.c | ||
| @@ -1155,11 +1155,11 @@ | ||
| 1155 | 1155 | Blob *pOut, /* Write simplified help text here */ |
| 1156 | 1156 | const char *zTopic, /* TOPIC */ |
| 1157 | 1157 | const char *zSubtopic, /* SUBTOPIC */ |
| 1158 | 1158 | int bAbbrevSubcmd /* True if z[] contains abbreviated subcommands */ |
| 1159 | 1159 | ){ |
| 1160 | - Blob in, line; //, subsection; | |
| 1160 | + Blob in, line;/*, subsection;*/ | |
| 1161 | 1161 | int n = 0; |
| 1162 | 1162 | char *zQTop = re_quote(zTopic); |
| 1163 | 1163 | char *zQSub = re_quote(zSubtopic); |
| 1164 | 1164 | char *zPattern; |
| 1165 | 1165 | ReCompiled *pRe = 0; |
| 1166 | 1166 |
| --- src/dispatch.c | |
| +++ src/dispatch.c | |
| @@ -1155,11 +1155,11 @@ | |
| 1155 | Blob *pOut, /* Write simplified help text here */ |
| 1156 | const char *zTopic, /* TOPIC */ |
| 1157 | const char *zSubtopic, /* SUBTOPIC */ |
| 1158 | int bAbbrevSubcmd /* True if z[] contains abbreviated subcommands */ |
| 1159 | ){ |
| 1160 | Blob in, line; //, subsection; |
| 1161 | int n = 0; |
| 1162 | char *zQTop = re_quote(zTopic); |
| 1163 | char *zQSub = re_quote(zSubtopic); |
| 1164 | char *zPattern; |
| 1165 | ReCompiled *pRe = 0; |
| 1166 |
| --- src/dispatch.c | |
| +++ src/dispatch.c | |
| @@ -1155,11 +1155,11 @@ | |
| 1155 | Blob *pOut, /* Write simplified help text here */ |
| 1156 | const char *zTopic, /* TOPIC */ |
| 1157 | const char *zSubtopic, /* SUBTOPIC */ |
| 1158 | int bAbbrevSubcmd /* True if z[] contains abbreviated subcommands */ |
| 1159 | ){ |
| 1160 | Blob in, line;/*, subsection;*/ |
| 1161 | int n = 0; |
| 1162 | char *zQTop = re_quote(zTopic); |
| 1163 | char *zQSub = re_quote(zSubtopic); |
| 1164 | char *zPattern; |
| 1165 | ReCompiled *pRe = 0; |
| 1166 |
+1
-1
| --- src/event.c | ||
| +++ src/event.c | ||
| @@ -425,11 +425,11 @@ | ||
| 425 | 425 | if( rid ){ |
| 426 | 426 | zClr = db_text("", "SELECT bgcolor FROM event WHERE objid=%d", rid); |
| 427 | 427 | if( zClr && zClr[0] ){ |
| 428 | 428 | const char * zRequestMethod = P("REQUEST_METHOD"); |
| 429 | 429 | if(zRequestMethod && 'G'==zRequestMethod[0]){ |
| 430 | - /* Apply saved color by defaut for GET requests | |
| 430 | + /* Apply saved color by default for GET requests | |
| 431 | 431 | ** (e.g., an Edit menu link). |
| 432 | 432 | */ |
| 433 | 433 | zClrFlag = " checked"; |
| 434 | 434 | } |
| 435 | 435 | } |
| 436 | 436 |
| --- src/event.c | |
| +++ src/event.c | |
| @@ -425,11 +425,11 @@ | |
| 425 | if( rid ){ |
| 426 | zClr = db_text("", "SELECT bgcolor FROM event WHERE objid=%d", rid); |
| 427 | if( zClr && zClr[0] ){ |
| 428 | const char * zRequestMethod = P("REQUEST_METHOD"); |
| 429 | if(zRequestMethod && 'G'==zRequestMethod[0]){ |
| 430 | /* Apply saved color by defaut for GET requests |
| 431 | ** (e.g., an Edit menu link). |
| 432 | */ |
| 433 | zClrFlag = " checked"; |
| 434 | } |
| 435 | } |
| 436 |
| --- src/event.c | |
| +++ src/event.c | |
| @@ -425,11 +425,11 @@ | |
| 425 | if( rid ){ |
| 426 | zClr = db_text("", "SELECT bgcolor FROM event WHERE objid=%d", rid); |
| 427 | if( zClr && zClr[0] ){ |
| 428 | const char * zRequestMethod = P("REQUEST_METHOD"); |
| 429 | if(zRequestMethod && 'G'==zRequestMethod[0]){ |
| 430 | /* Apply saved color by default for GET requests |
| 431 | ** (e.g., an Edit menu link). |
| 432 | */ |
| 433 | zClrFlag = " checked"; |
| 434 | } |
| 435 | } |
| 436 |
+2
-2
| --- src/export.c | ||
| +++ src/export.c | ||
| @@ -28,11 +28,11 @@ | ||
| 28 | 28 | const char *zTrunkName; /* Name of trunk branch */ |
| 29 | 29 | } gexport; |
| 30 | 30 | |
| 31 | 31 | #if INTERFACE |
| 32 | 32 | /* |
| 33 | -** Each line in a git-fast-export "marK" file is an instance of | |
| 33 | +** Each line in a git-fast-export "mark" file is an instance of | |
| 34 | 34 | ** this object. |
| 35 | 35 | */ |
| 36 | 36 | struct mark_t { |
| 37 | 37 | char *name; /* Name of the mark. Also starts with ":" */ |
| 38 | 38 | int rid; /* Corresponding object in the BLOB table */ |
| @@ -759,11 +759,11 @@ | ||
| 759 | 759 | ** |
| 760 | 760 | ** This table contains all check-ins of the repository in topological |
| 761 | 761 | ** order. "Topological order" means that every parent check-in comes |
| 762 | 762 | ** before all of its children. Topological order is *almost* the same |
| 763 | 763 | ** thing as "ORDER BY event.mtime". Differences only arise when there |
| 764 | -** are timewarps. In as much as Git hates timewarps, we have to compute | |
| 764 | +** are timewarps. Inasmuch as Git hates timewarps, we have to compute | |
| 765 | 765 | ** a correct topological order when doing an export. |
| 766 | 766 | ** |
| 767 | 767 | ** Since mtime is a usually already nearly in topological order, the |
| 768 | 768 | ** algorithm is to start with mtime, then make adjustments as necessary |
| 769 | 769 | ** for timewarps. This is not a great algorithm for the general case, |
| 770 | 770 |
| --- src/export.c | |
| +++ src/export.c | |
| @@ -28,11 +28,11 @@ | |
| 28 | const char *zTrunkName; /* Name of trunk branch */ |
| 29 | } gexport; |
| 30 | |
| 31 | #if INTERFACE |
| 32 | /* |
| 33 | ** Each line in a git-fast-export "marK" file is an instance of |
| 34 | ** this object. |
| 35 | */ |
| 36 | struct mark_t { |
| 37 | char *name; /* Name of the mark. Also starts with ":" */ |
| 38 | int rid; /* Corresponding object in the BLOB table */ |
| @@ -759,11 +759,11 @@ | |
| 759 | ** |
| 760 | ** This table contains all check-ins of the repository in topological |
| 761 | ** order. "Topological order" means that every parent check-in comes |
| 762 | ** before all of its children. Topological order is *almost* the same |
| 763 | ** thing as "ORDER BY event.mtime". Differences only arise when there |
| 764 | ** are timewarps. In as much as Git hates timewarps, we have to compute |
| 765 | ** a correct topological order when doing an export. |
| 766 | ** |
| 767 | ** Since mtime is a usually already nearly in topological order, the |
| 768 | ** algorithm is to start with mtime, then make adjustments as necessary |
| 769 | ** for timewarps. This is not a great algorithm for the general case, |
| 770 |
| --- src/export.c | |
| +++ src/export.c | |
| @@ -28,11 +28,11 @@ | |
| 28 | const char *zTrunkName; /* Name of trunk branch */ |
| 29 | } gexport; |
| 30 | |
| 31 | #if INTERFACE |
| 32 | /* |
| 33 | ** Each line in a git-fast-export "mark" file is an instance of |
| 34 | ** this object. |
| 35 | */ |
| 36 | struct mark_t { |
| 37 | char *name; /* Name of the mark. Also starts with ":" */ |
| 38 | int rid; /* Corresponding object in the BLOB table */ |
| @@ -759,11 +759,11 @@ | |
| 759 | ** |
| 760 | ** This table contains all check-ins of the repository in topological |
| 761 | ** order. "Topological order" means that every parent check-in comes |
| 762 | ** before all of its children. Topological order is *almost* the same |
| 763 | ** thing as "ORDER BY event.mtime". Differences only arise when there |
| 764 | ** are timewarps. Inasmuch as Git hates timewarps, we have to compute |
| 765 | ** a correct topological order when doing an export. |
| 766 | ** |
| 767 | ** Since mtime is a usually already nearly in topological order, the |
| 768 | ** algorithm is to start with mtime, then make adjustments as necessary |
| 769 | ** for timewarps. This is not a great algorithm for the general case, |
| 770 |
+2
-2
| --- src/fileedit.c | ||
| +++ src/fileedit.c | ||
| @@ -48,11 +48,11 @@ | ||
| 48 | 48 | Blob comment; /* Check-in comment text */ |
| 49 | 49 | char *zCommentMimetype; /* Mimetype of comment. May be NULL */ |
| 50 | 50 | char *zUser; /* User name */ |
| 51 | 51 | char *zDate; /* Optionally force this date string (anything |
| 52 | 52 | supported by date_in_standard_format()). |
| 53 | - Maybe be NULL. */ | |
| 53 | + May be NULL. */ | |
| 54 | 54 | Blob *pMfOut; /* If not NULL, checkin_mini() will write a |
| 55 | 55 | copy of the generated manifest here. This |
| 56 | 56 | memory is NOT owned by CheckinMiniInfo. */ |
| 57 | 57 | int filePerm; /* Permissions (via file_perm()) of the input |
| 58 | 58 | file. We need to store this before calling |
| @@ -123,11 +123,11 @@ | ||
| 123 | 123 | */ |
| 124 | 124 | CIMINI_PREFER_DELTA = 1<<8, |
| 125 | 125 | /* |
| 126 | 126 | ** A "stronger hint" to checkin_mini() to prefer creation of a delta |
| 127 | 127 | ** manifest if it at all can. It will decide not to only if creation |
| 128 | -** of a delta is not a realistic option or if it's forbitted by the | |
| 128 | +** of a delta is not a realistic option or if it's forbidden by the | |
| 129 | 129 | ** forbid-delta-manifests repo config option. For this to work, it |
| 130 | 130 | ** must be set together with the CIMINI_PREFER_DELTA flag, but the two |
| 131 | 131 | ** cannot be combined in this enum. |
| 132 | 132 | ** |
| 133 | 133 | ** This option is ONLY INTENDED FOR TESTING, used in bypassing |
| 134 | 134 |
| --- src/fileedit.c | |
| +++ src/fileedit.c | |
| @@ -48,11 +48,11 @@ | |
| 48 | Blob comment; /* Check-in comment text */ |
| 49 | char *zCommentMimetype; /* Mimetype of comment. May be NULL */ |
| 50 | char *zUser; /* User name */ |
| 51 | char *zDate; /* Optionally force this date string (anything |
| 52 | supported by date_in_standard_format()). |
| 53 | Maybe be NULL. */ |
| 54 | Blob *pMfOut; /* If not NULL, checkin_mini() will write a |
| 55 | copy of the generated manifest here. This |
| 56 | memory is NOT owned by CheckinMiniInfo. */ |
| 57 | int filePerm; /* Permissions (via file_perm()) of the input |
| 58 | file. We need to store this before calling |
| @@ -123,11 +123,11 @@ | |
| 123 | */ |
| 124 | CIMINI_PREFER_DELTA = 1<<8, |
| 125 | /* |
| 126 | ** A "stronger hint" to checkin_mini() to prefer creation of a delta |
| 127 | ** manifest if it at all can. It will decide not to only if creation |
| 128 | ** of a delta is not a realistic option or if it's forbitted by the |
| 129 | ** forbid-delta-manifests repo config option. For this to work, it |
| 130 | ** must be set together with the CIMINI_PREFER_DELTA flag, but the two |
| 131 | ** cannot be combined in this enum. |
| 132 | ** |
| 133 | ** This option is ONLY INTENDED FOR TESTING, used in bypassing |
| 134 |
| --- src/fileedit.c | |
| +++ src/fileedit.c | |
| @@ -48,11 +48,11 @@ | |
| 48 | Blob comment; /* Check-in comment text */ |
| 49 | char *zCommentMimetype; /* Mimetype of comment. May be NULL */ |
| 50 | char *zUser; /* User name */ |
| 51 | char *zDate; /* Optionally force this date string (anything |
| 52 | supported by date_in_standard_format()). |
| 53 | May be NULL. */ |
| 54 | Blob *pMfOut; /* If not NULL, checkin_mini() will write a |
| 55 | copy of the generated manifest here. This |
| 56 | memory is NOT owned by CheckinMiniInfo. */ |
| 57 | int filePerm; /* Permissions (via file_perm()) of the input |
| 58 | file. We need to store this before calling |
| @@ -123,11 +123,11 @@ | |
| 123 | */ |
| 124 | CIMINI_PREFER_DELTA = 1<<8, |
| 125 | /* |
| 126 | ** A "stronger hint" to checkin_mini() to prefer creation of a delta |
| 127 | ** manifest if it at all can. It will decide not to only if creation |
| 128 | ** of a delta is not a realistic option or if it's forbidden by the |
| 129 | ** forbid-delta-manifests repo config option. For this to work, it |
| 130 | ** must be set together with the CIMINI_PREFER_DELTA flag, but the two |
| 131 | ** cannot be combined in this enum. |
| 132 | ** |
| 133 | ** This option is ONLY INTENDED FOR TESTING, used in bypassing |
| 134 |
+1
-1
| --- src/forum.c | ||
| +++ src/forum.c | ||
| @@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ | ||
| 133 | 133 | ** (recursively), else they are not. When checking in-response-to |
| 134 | 134 | ** posts, the first one which is closed ends the search. |
| 135 | 135 | ** |
| 136 | 136 | ** Note that this function checks _exactly_ the given rid, whereas |
| 137 | 137 | ** forum post closure/re-opening is always applied to the head of an |
| 138 | -** edit chain so that we get consistent implied locking beheavior for | |
| 138 | +** edit chain so that we get consistent implied locking behavior for | |
| 139 | 139 | ** later versions and responses to arbitrary versions in the |
| 140 | 140 | ** chain. Even so, the "closed" tag is applied as a propagating tag |
| 141 | 141 | ** so will apply to all edits in a given chain. |
| 142 | 142 | ** |
| 143 | 143 | ** The return value is one of: |
| 144 | 144 |
| --- src/forum.c | |
| +++ src/forum.c | |
| @@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ | |
| 133 | ** (recursively), else they are not. When checking in-response-to |
| 134 | ** posts, the first one which is closed ends the search. |
| 135 | ** |
| 136 | ** Note that this function checks _exactly_ the given rid, whereas |
| 137 | ** forum post closure/re-opening is always applied to the head of an |
| 138 | ** edit chain so that we get consistent implied locking beheavior for |
| 139 | ** later versions and responses to arbitrary versions in the |
| 140 | ** chain. Even so, the "closed" tag is applied as a propagating tag |
| 141 | ** so will apply to all edits in a given chain. |
| 142 | ** |
| 143 | ** The return value is one of: |
| 144 |
| --- src/forum.c | |
| +++ src/forum.c | |
| @@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ | |
| 133 | ** (recursively), else they are not. When checking in-response-to |
| 134 | ** posts, the first one which is closed ends the search. |
| 135 | ** |
| 136 | ** Note that this function checks _exactly_ the given rid, whereas |
| 137 | ** forum post closure/re-opening is always applied to the head of an |
| 138 | ** edit chain so that we get consistent implied locking behavior for |
| 139 | ** later versions and responses to arbitrary versions in the |
| 140 | ** chain. Even so, the "closed" tag is applied as a propagating tag |
| 141 | ** so will apply to all edits in a given chain. |
| 142 | ** |
| 143 | ** The return value is one of: |
| 144 |
+1
-1
| --- src/fossil.diff.js | ||
| +++ src/fossil.diff.js | ||
| @@ -106,11 +106,11 @@ | ||
| 106 | 106 | chunkLoadLines: ( |
| 107 | 107 | F.config.diffContextLines * 3 |
| 108 | 108 | /*per /chat discussion*/ |
| 109 | 109 | ) || 20, |
| 110 | 110 | chunkFetch: { |
| 111 | - /* Default callack handlers for Diff.fetchArtifactChunk(), | |
| 111 | + /* Default callback handlers for Diff.fetchArtifactChunk(), | |
| 112 | 112 | unless overridden by options passeed to that function. */ |
| 113 | 113 | beforesend: function(){}, |
| 114 | 114 | aftersend: function(){}, |
| 115 | 115 | onerror: function(e){ |
| 116 | 116 | console.error("XHR error: ",e); |
| 117 | 117 |
| --- src/fossil.diff.js | |
| +++ src/fossil.diff.js | |
| @@ -106,11 +106,11 @@ | |
| 106 | chunkLoadLines: ( |
| 107 | F.config.diffContextLines * 3 |
| 108 | /*per /chat discussion*/ |
| 109 | ) || 20, |
| 110 | chunkFetch: { |
| 111 | /* Default callack handlers for Diff.fetchArtifactChunk(), |
| 112 | unless overridden by options passeed to that function. */ |
| 113 | beforesend: function(){}, |
| 114 | aftersend: function(){}, |
| 115 | onerror: function(e){ |
| 116 | console.error("XHR error: ",e); |
| 117 |
| --- src/fossil.diff.js | |
| +++ src/fossil.diff.js | |
| @@ -106,11 +106,11 @@ | |
| 106 | chunkLoadLines: ( |
| 107 | F.config.diffContextLines * 3 |
| 108 | /*per /chat discussion*/ |
| 109 | ) || 20, |
| 110 | chunkFetch: { |
| 111 | /* Default callback handlers for Diff.fetchArtifactChunk(), |
| 112 | unless overridden by options passeed to that function. */ |
| 113 | beforesend: function(){}, |
| 114 | aftersend: function(){}, |
| 115 | onerror: function(e){ |
| 116 | console.error("XHR error: ",e); |
| 117 |
+2
-2
| --- src/fossil.page.chat.js | ||
| +++ src/fossil.page.chat.js | ||
| @@ -1050,11 +1050,11 @@ | ||
| 1050 | 1050 | if(eUser==this || !eUser) return false; |
| 1051 | 1051 | const uname = eUser.dataset.uname; |
| 1052 | 1052 | let eLast; |
| 1053 | 1053 | cs.setCurrentView(cs.e.viewMessages); |
| 1054 | 1054 | if(eUser.classList.contains('selected')){ |
| 1055 | - /* If curently selected, toggle filter off */ | |
| 1055 | + /* If currently selected, toggle filter off */ | |
| 1056 | 1056 | eUser.classList.remove('selected'); |
| 1057 | 1057 | cs.setUserFilter(false); |
| 1058 | 1058 | delete f.$eSelected; |
| 1059 | 1059 | }else{ |
| 1060 | 1060 | if(f.$eSelected) f.$eSelected.classList.remove('selected'); |
| @@ -2856,11 +2856,11 @@ | ||
| 2856 | 2856 | beforesend: chatPollBeforeSend, |
| 2857 | 2857 | aftersend: function(){ |
| 2858 | 2858 | poll.running = false; |
| 2859 | 2859 | }, |
| 2860 | 2860 | ontimeout: function(err){ |
| 2861 | - f.pendingOnError = undefined /*strip preceeding non-timeout error, if any*/; | |
| 2861 | + f.pendingOnError = undefined /*strip preceding non-timeout error, if any*/; | |
| 2862 | 2862 | afterPollFetch(err); |
| 2863 | 2863 | }, |
| 2864 | 2864 | onerror:function(err){ |
| 2865 | 2865 | Chat._isBatchLoading = false; |
| 2866 | 2866 | if(Chat.beVerbose){ |
| 2867 | 2867 |
| --- src/fossil.page.chat.js | |
| +++ src/fossil.page.chat.js | |
| @@ -1050,11 +1050,11 @@ | |
| 1050 | if(eUser==this || !eUser) return false; |
| 1051 | const uname = eUser.dataset.uname; |
| 1052 | let eLast; |
| 1053 | cs.setCurrentView(cs.e.viewMessages); |
| 1054 | if(eUser.classList.contains('selected')){ |
| 1055 | /* If curently selected, toggle filter off */ |
| 1056 | eUser.classList.remove('selected'); |
| 1057 | cs.setUserFilter(false); |
| 1058 | delete f.$eSelected; |
| 1059 | }else{ |
| 1060 | if(f.$eSelected) f.$eSelected.classList.remove('selected'); |
| @@ -2856,11 +2856,11 @@ | |
| 2856 | beforesend: chatPollBeforeSend, |
| 2857 | aftersend: function(){ |
| 2858 | poll.running = false; |
| 2859 | }, |
| 2860 | ontimeout: function(err){ |
| 2861 | f.pendingOnError = undefined /*strip preceeding non-timeout error, if any*/; |
| 2862 | afterPollFetch(err); |
| 2863 | }, |
| 2864 | onerror:function(err){ |
| 2865 | Chat._isBatchLoading = false; |
| 2866 | if(Chat.beVerbose){ |
| 2867 |
| --- src/fossil.page.chat.js | |
| +++ src/fossil.page.chat.js | |
| @@ -1050,11 +1050,11 @@ | |
| 1050 | if(eUser==this || !eUser) return false; |
| 1051 | const uname = eUser.dataset.uname; |
| 1052 | let eLast; |
| 1053 | cs.setCurrentView(cs.e.viewMessages); |
| 1054 | if(eUser.classList.contains('selected')){ |
| 1055 | /* If currently selected, toggle filter off */ |
| 1056 | eUser.classList.remove('selected'); |
| 1057 | cs.setUserFilter(false); |
| 1058 | delete f.$eSelected; |
| 1059 | }else{ |
| 1060 | if(f.$eSelected) f.$eSelected.classList.remove('selected'); |
| @@ -2856,11 +2856,11 @@ | |
| 2856 | beforesend: chatPollBeforeSend, |
| 2857 | aftersend: function(){ |
| 2858 | poll.running = false; |
| 2859 | }, |
| 2860 | ontimeout: function(err){ |
| 2861 | f.pendingOnError = undefined /*strip preceding non-timeout error, if any*/; |
| 2862 | afterPollFetch(err); |
| 2863 | }, |
| 2864 | onerror:function(err){ |
| 2865 | Chat._isBatchLoading = false; |
| 2866 | if(Chat.beVerbose){ |
| 2867 |
+1
-1
| --- src/fossil.wikiedit-wysiwyg.js | ||
| +++ src/fossil.wikiedit-wysiwyg.js | ||
| @@ -449,11 +449,11 @@ | ||
| 449 | 449 | oDoc.focus(); |
| 450 | 450 | } |
| 451 | 451 | |
| 452 | 452 | //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// |
| 453 | 453 | // A hook which can be activated via a site skin to plug this editor |
| 454 | - // in to the wikiedit page. | |
| 454 | + // into the wikiedit page. | |
| 455 | 455 | F.page.wysiwyg = { |
| 456 | 456 | // only for debugging: oDoc: oDoc, |
| 457 | 457 | /* |
| 458 | 458 | Replaces wikiedit's default editor widget with this wysiwyg |
| 459 | 459 | editor. |
| 460 | 460 |
| --- src/fossil.wikiedit-wysiwyg.js | |
| +++ src/fossil.wikiedit-wysiwyg.js | |
| @@ -449,11 +449,11 @@ | |
| 449 | oDoc.focus(); |
| 450 | } |
| 451 | |
| 452 | //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// |
| 453 | // A hook which can be activated via a site skin to plug this editor |
| 454 | // in to the wikiedit page. |
| 455 | F.page.wysiwyg = { |
| 456 | // only for debugging: oDoc: oDoc, |
| 457 | /* |
| 458 | Replaces wikiedit's default editor widget with this wysiwyg |
| 459 | editor. |
| 460 |
| --- src/fossil.wikiedit-wysiwyg.js | |
| +++ src/fossil.wikiedit-wysiwyg.js | |
| @@ -449,11 +449,11 @@ | |
| 449 | oDoc.focus(); |
| 450 | } |
| 451 | |
| 452 | //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// |
| 453 | // A hook which can be activated via a site skin to plug this editor |
| 454 | // into the wikiedit page. |
| 455 | F.page.wysiwyg = { |
| 456 | // only for debugging: oDoc: oDoc, |
| 457 | /* |
| 458 | Replaces wikiedit's default editor widget with this wysiwyg |
| 459 | editor. |
| 460 |
+1
-1
| --- src/fshell.c | ||
| +++ src/fshell.c | ||
| @@ -21,11 +21,11 @@ | ||
| 21 | 21 | ** after the fashion of a standard Bourne shell and forks a child process |
| 22 | 22 | ** to run the corresponding Fossil command. This only works on Unix. |
| 23 | 23 | ** |
| 24 | 24 | ** The "fossil shell" command is intended for use with SEE-enabled fossil. |
| 25 | 25 | ** It allows multiple commands to be issued without having to reenter the |
| 26 | -** crypto phasephrase for each command. | |
| 26 | +** crypto passphrase for each command. | |
| 27 | 27 | */ |
| 28 | 28 | #include "config.h" |
| 29 | 29 | #include "fshell.h" |
| 30 | 30 | #include <ctype.h> |
| 31 | 31 | |
| 32 | 32 |
| --- src/fshell.c | |
| +++ src/fshell.c | |
| @@ -21,11 +21,11 @@ | |
| 21 | ** after the fashion of a standard Bourne shell and forks a child process |
| 22 | ** to run the corresponding Fossil command. This only works on Unix. |
| 23 | ** |
| 24 | ** The "fossil shell" command is intended for use with SEE-enabled fossil. |
| 25 | ** It allows multiple commands to be issued without having to reenter the |
| 26 | ** crypto phasephrase for each command. |
| 27 | */ |
| 28 | #include "config.h" |
| 29 | #include "fshell.h" |
| 30 | #include <ctype.h> |
| 31 | |
| 32 |
| --- src/fshell.c | |
| +++ src/fshell.c | |
| @@ -21,11 +21,11 @@ | |
| 21 | ** after the fashion of a standard Bourne shell and forks a child process |
| 22 | ** to run the corresponding Fossil command. This only works on Unix. |
| 23 | ** |
| 24 | ** The "fossil shell" command is intended for use with SEE-enabled fossil. |
| 25 | ** It allows multiple commands to be issued without having to reenter the |
| 26 | ** crypto passphrase for each command. |
| 27 | */ |
| 28 | #include "config.h" |
| 29 | #include "fshell.h" |
| 30 | #include <ctype.h> |
| 31 | |
| 32 |
+2
-2
| --- src/glob.c | ||
| +++ src/glob.c | ||
| @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ | ||
| 29 | 29 | ** zVal: "x" |
| 30 | 30 | ** zGlobList: "*.o,*.obj" |
| 31 | 31 | ** |
| 32 | 32 | ** Result: "(x GLOB '*.o' OR x GLOB '*.obj')" |
| 33 | 33 | ** |
| 34 | -** Commas and whitespace are considered to be element delimters. Each | |
| 34 | +** Commas and whitespace are considered to be element delimiters. Each | |
| 35 | 35 | ** element of the GLOB list may optionally be enclosed in either '...' or |
| 36 | 36 | ** "...". This allows commas and/or whitespace to be used in the elements |
| 37 | 37 | ** themselves. |
| 38 | 38 | ** |
| 39 | 39 | ** The returned string is owned by the caller, who must fossil_free() |
| @@ -57,11 +57,11 @@ | ||
| 57 | 57 | cTerm = zGlobList[0]; |
| 58 | 58 | zGlobList++; |
| 59 | 59 | }else{ |
| 60 | 60 | cTerm = ','; |
| 61 | 61 | } |
| 62 | - /* Find the next delimter (or the end of the string). */ | |
| 62 | + /* Find the next delimiter (or the end of the string). */ | |
| 63 | 63 | for(i=0; zGlobList[i] && zGlobList[i]!=cTerm; i++){ |
| 64 | 64 | if( cTerm!=',' ) continue; /* If quoted, keep going. */ |
| 65 | 65 | if( fossil_isspace(zGlobList[i]) ) break; /* If space, stop. */ |
| 66 | 66 | } |
| 67 | 67 | blob_appendf(&expr, "%s%s GLOB '%#q'", zSep, zVal, i, zGlobList); |
| 68 | 68 |
| --- src/glob.c | |
| +++ src/glob.c | |
| @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ | |
| 29 | ** zVal: "x" |
| 30 | ** zGlobList: "*.o,*.obj" |
| 31 | ** |
| 32 | ** Result: "(x GLOB '*.o' OR x GLOB '*.obj')" |
| 33 | ** |
| 34 | ** Commas and whitespace are considered to be element delimters. Each |
| 35 | ** element of the GLOB list may optionally be enclosed in either '...' or |
| 36 | ** "...". This allows commas and/or whitespace to be used in the elements |
| 37 | ** themselves. |
| 38 | ** |
| 39 | ** The returned string is owned by the caller, who must fossil_free() |
| @@ -57,11 +57,11 @@ | |
| 57 | cTerm = zGlobList[0]; |
| 58 | zGlobList++; |
| 59 | }else{ |
| 60 | cTerm = ','; |
| 61 | } |
| 62 | /* Find the next delimter (or the end of the string). */ |
| 63 | for(i=0; zGlobList[i] && zGlobList[i]!=cTerm; i++){ |
| 64 | if( cTerm!=',' ) continue; /* If quoted, keep going. */ |
| 65 | if( fossil_isspace(zGlobList[i]) ) break; /* If space, stop. */ |
| 66 | } |
| 67 | blob_appendf(&expr, "%s%s GLOB '%#q'", zSep, zVal, i, zGlobList); |
| 68 |
| --- src/glob.c | |
| +++ src/glob.c | |
| @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ | |
| 29 | ** zVal: "x" |
| 30 | ** zGlobList: "*.o,*.obj" |
| 31 | ** |
| 32 | ** Result: "(x GLOB '*.o' OR x GLOB '*.obj')" |
| 33 | ** |
| 34 | ** Commas and whitespace are considered to be element delimiters. Each |
| 35 | ** element of the GLOB list may optionally be enclosed in either '...' or |
| 36 | ** "...". This allows commas and/or whitespace to be used in the elements |
| 37 | ** themselves. |
| 38 | ** |
| 39 | ** The returned string is owned by the caller, who must fossil_free() |
| @@ -57,11 +57,11 @@ | |
| 57 | cTerm = zGlobList[0]; |
| 58 | zGlobList++; |
| 59 | }else{ |
| 60 | cTerm = ','; |
| 61 | } |
| 62 | /* Find the next delimiter (or the end of the string). */ |
| 63 | for(i=0; zGlobList[i] && zGlobList[i]!=cTerm; i++){ |
| 64 | if( cTerm!=',' ) continue; /* If quoted, keep going. */ |
| 65 | if( fossil_isspace(zGlobList[i]) ) break; /* If space, stop. */ |
| 66 | } |
| 67 | blob_appendf(&expr, "%s%s GLOB '%#q'", zSep, zVal, i, zGlobList); |
| 68 |
+1
-1
| --- src/hname.c | ||
| +++ src/hname.c | ||
| @@ -199,11 +199,11 @@ | ||
| 199 | 199 | |
| 200 | 200 | /* |
| 201 | 201 | ** Return the default hash policy for repositories that do not currently |
| 202 | 202 | ** have an assigned hash policy. |
| 203 | 203 | ** |
| 204 | -** Make the default HPOLICY_AUTO if there are SHA1 artficates but no SHA3 | |
| 204 | +** Make the default HPOLICY_AUTO if there are SHA1 artifacts but no SHA3 | |
| 205 | 205 | ** artifacts in the repository. Make the default HPOLICY_SHA3 if there |
| 206 | 206 | ** are one or more SHA3 artifacts or if the repository is initially empty. |
| 207 | 207 | */ |
| 208 | 208 | int hname_default_policy(void){ |
| 209 | 209 | if( db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM blob WHERE length(uuid)>40") |
| 210 | 210 |
| --- src/hname.c | |
| +++ src/hname.c | |
| @@ -199,11 +199,11 @@ | |
| 199 | |
| 200 | /* |
| 201 | ** Return the default hash policy for repositories that do not currently |
| 202 | ** have an assigned hash policy. |
| 203 | ** |
| 204 | ** Make the default HPOLICY_AUTO if there are SHA1 artficates but no SHA3 |
| 205 | ** artifacts in the repository. Make the default HPOLICY_SHA3 if there |
| 206 | ** are one or more SHA3 artifacts or if the repository is initially empty. |
| 207 | */ |
| 208 | int hname_default_policy(void){ |
| 209 | if( db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM blob WHERE length(uuid)>40") |
| 210 |
| --- src/hname.c | |
| +++ src/hname.c | |
| @@ -199,11 +199,11 @@ | |
| 199 | |
| 200 | /* |
| 201 | ** Return the default hash policy for repositories that do not currently |
| 202 | ** have an assigned hash policy. |
| 203 | ** |
| 204 | ** Make the default HPOLICY_AUTO if there are SHA1 artifacts but no SHA3 |
| 205 | ** artifacts in the repository. Make the default HPOLICY_SHA3 if there |
| 206 | ** are one or more SHA3 artifacts or if the repository is initially empty. |
| 207 | */ |
| 208 | int hname_default_policy(void){ |
| 209 | if( db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM blob WHERE length(uuid)>40") |
| 210 |
+1
-1
| --- src/hook.c | ||
| +++ src/hook.c | ||
| @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ | ||
| 29 | 29 | ** } |
| 30 | 30 | ** |
| 31 | 31 | ** hook-last-rcvid The last rcvid for which post-receive hooks were |
| 32 | 32 | ** run. |
| 33 | 33 | ** |
| 34 | -** hook-embargo Do not run hooks again before this julianday. | |
| 34 | +** hook-embargo Do not run hooks again before this Julian day. | |
| 35 | 35 | ** |
| 36 | 36 | ** For "after-receive" hooks, a list of the received artifacts is sent |
| 37 | 37 | ** into the command via standard input. Each line of input begins with |
| 38 | 38 | ** the hash of the artifact and continues with a description of the |
| 39 | 39 | ** interpretation of the artifact. |
| 40 | 40 |
| --- src/hook.c | |
| +++ src/hook.c | |
| @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ | |
| 29 | ** } |
| 30 | ** |
| 31 | ** hook-last-rcvid The last rcvid for which post-receive hooks were |
| 32 | ** run. |
| 33 | ** |
| 34 | ** hook-embargo Do not run hooks again before this julianday. |
| 35 | ** |
| 36 | ** For "after-receive" hooks, a list of the received artifacts is sent |
| 37 | ** into the command via standard input. Each line of input begins with |
| 38 | ** the hash of the artifact and continues with a description of the |
| 39 | ** interpretation of the artifact. |
| 40 |
| --- src/hook.c | |
| +++ src/hook.c | |
| @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ | |
| 29 | ** } |
| 30 | ** |
| 31 | ** hook-last-rcvid The last rcvid for which post-receive hooks were |
| 32 | ** run. |
| 33 | ** |
| 34 | ** hook-embargo Do not run hooks again before this Julian day. |
| 35 | ** |
| 36 | ** For "after-receive" hooks, a list of the received artifacts is sent |
| 37 | ** into the command via standard input. Each line of input begins with |
| 38 | ** the hash of the artifact and continues with a description of the |
| 39 | ** interpretation of the artifact. |
| 40 |
+1
-1
| --- src/http.c | ||
| +++ src/http.c | ||
| @@ -353,11 +353,11 @@ | ||
| 353 | 353 | db_finalize(&s); |
| 354 | 354 | db_swap_connections(); |
| 355 | 355 | } |
| 356 | 356 | } |
| 357 | 357 | |
| 358 | -/* Add an approprate PATH= argument to the SSH command under construction | |
| 358 | +/* Add an appropriate PATH= argument to the SSH command under construction | |
| 359 | 359 | ** in pCmd. |
| 360 | 360 | ** |
| 361 | 361 | ** About This Feature |
| 362 | 362 | ** ================== |
| 363 | 363 | ** |
| 364 | 364 |
| --- src/http.c | |
| +++ src/http.c | |
| @@ -353,11 +353,11 @@ | |
| 353 | db_finalize(&s); |
| 354 | db_swap_connections(); |
| 355 | } |
| 356 | } |
| 357 | |
| 358 | /* Add an approprate PATH= argument to the SSH command under construction |
| 359 | ** in pCmd. |
| 360 | ** |
| 361 | ** About This Feature |
| 362 | ** ================== |
| 363 | ** |
| 364 |
| --- src/http.c | |
| +++ src/http.c | |
| @@ -353,11 +353,11 @@ | |
| 353 | db_finalize(&s); |
| 354 | db_swap_connections(); |
| 355 | } |
| 356 | } |
| 357 | |
| 358 | /* Add an appropriate PATH= argument to the SSH command under construction |
| 359 | ** in pCmd. |
| 360 | ** |
| 361 | ** About This Feature |
| 362 | ** ================== |
| 363 | ** |
| 364 |
+1
-1
| --- src/http_ssl.c | ||
| +++ src/http_ssl.c | ||
| @@ -270,11 +270,11 @@ | ||
| 270 | 270 | |
| 271 | 271 | /* Find the trust store */ |
| 272 | 272 | zFile = 0; |
| 273 | 273 | for(i=0; zFile==0 && i<5; i++){ |
| 274 | 274 | switch( i ){ |
| 275 | - case 0: /* First priority is environmentn variables */ | |
| 275 | + case 0: /* First priority is environment variables */ | |
| 276 | 276 | zFile = fossil_getenv(X509_get_default_cert_file_env()); |
| 277 | 277 | break; |
| 278 | 278 | case 1: |
| 279 | 279 | zFile = fossil_getenv(X509_get_default_cert_dir_env()); |
| 280 | 280 | break; |
| 281 | 281 |
| --- src/http_ssl.c | |
| +++ src/http_ssl.c | |
| @@ -270,11 +270,11 @@ | |
| 270 | |
| 271 | /* Find the trust store */ |
| 272 | zFile = 0; |
| 273 | for(i=0; zFile==0 && i<5; i++){ |
| 274 | switch( i ){ |
| 275 | case 0: /* First priority is environmentn variables */ |
| 276 | zFile = fossil_getenv(X509_get_default_cert_file_env()); |
| 277 | break; |
| 278 | case 1: |
| 279 | zFile = fossil_getenv(X509_get_default_cert_dir_env()); |
| 280 | break; |
| 281 |
| --- src/http_ssl.c | |
| +++ src/http_ssl.c | |
| @@ -270,11 +270,11 @@ | |
| 270 | |
| 271 | /* Find the trust store */ |
| 272 | zFile = 0; |
| 273 | for(i=0; zFile==0 && i<5; i++){ |
| 274 | switch( i ){ |
| 275 | case 0: /* First priority is environment variables */ |
| 276 | zFile = fossil_getenv(X509_get_default_cert_file_env()); |
| 277 | break; |
| 278 | case 1: |
| 279 | zFile = fossil_getenv(X509_get_default_cert_dir_env()); |
| 280 | break; |
| 281 |
+4
-4
| --- src/json.c | ||
| +++ src/json.c | ||
| @@ -240,11 +240,11 @@ | ||
| 240 | 240 | ** - g.json.gc.a is NULL |
| 241 | 241 | ** - key is NULL or empty. |
| 242 | 242 | ** |
| 243 | 243 | ** Returns 0 on success. |
| 244 | 244 | ** |
| 245 | -** Ownership of v is transfered to (or shared with) g.json.gc, and v | |
| 245 | +** Ownership of v is transferred to (or shared with) g.json.gc, and v | |
| 246 | 246 | ** will be valid until that object is cleaned up or some internal code |
| 247 | 247 | ** incorrectly removes it from the gc (which we never do). If this |
| 248 | 248 | ** function fails, it is fatal to the app (as it indicates an |
| 249 | 249 | ** allocation error (more likely than not) or a serious internal error |
| 250 | 250 | ** such as numeric overflow). |
| @@ -271,11 +271,11 @@ | ||
| 271 | 271 | |
| 272 | 272 | |
| 273 | 273 | /* |
| 274 | 274 | ** Returns the value of json_rc_cstr(code) as a new JSON |
| 275 | 275 | ** string, which is owned by the caller and must eventually |
| 276 | -** be cson_value_free()d or transfered to a JSON container. | |
| 276 | +** be cson_value_free()d or transferred to a JSON container. | |
| 277 | 277 | */ |
| 278 | 278 | cson_value * json_rc_string( int code ){ |
| 279 | 279 | return cson_value_new_string( json_rc_cstr(code), 11 ); |
| 280 | 280 | } |
| 281 | 281 | |
| @@ -864,11 +864,11 @@ | ||
| 864 | 864 | /* |
| 865 | 865 | ** Splits zStr (which must not be NULL) into tokens separated by the |
| 866 | 866 | ** given separator character. If doDeHttp is true then each element |
| 867 | 867 | ** will be passed through dehttpize(), otherwise they are used |
| 868 | 868 | ** as-is. Note that tokenization happens before dehttpize(), |
| 869 | -** which is significant if the ENcoded tokens might contain the | |
| 869 | +** which is significant if the encoded tokens might contain the | |
| 870 | 870 | ** separator character. |
| 871 | 871 | ** |
| 872 | 872 | ** Each new element is appended to the given target array object, |
| 873 | 873 | ** which must not be NULL and ownership of it is not changed by this |
| 874 | 874 | ** call. |
| @@ -1437,11 +1437,11 @@ | ||
| 1437 | 1437 | ** If payload is not NULL and resultCode is 0 then it is set as the |
| 1438 | 1438 | ** "payload" property of the returned object. If resultCode is 0 then |
| 1439 | 1439 | ** it defaults to g.json.resultCode. If resultCode is (or defaults to) |
| 1440 | 1440 | ** non-zero and payload is not NULL then this function calls |
| 1441 | 1441 | ** cson_value_free(payload) and does not insert the payload into the |
| 1442 | -** response. In either case, ownership of payload is transfered to (or | |
| 1442 | +** response. In either case, ownership of payload is transferred to (or | |
| 1443 | 1443 | ** shared with, if the caller holds a reference) this function. |
| 1444 | 1444 | ** |
| 1445 | 1445 | ** pMsg is an optional message string property (resultText) of the |
| 1446 | 1446 | ** response. If resultCode is non-0 and pMsg is NULL then |
| 1447 | 1447 | ** json_err_cstr() is used to get the error string. The caller may |
| 1448 | 1448 |
| --- src/json.c | |
| +++ src/json.c | |
| @@ -240,11 +240,11 @@ | |
| 240 | ** - g.json.gc.a is NULL |
| 241 | ** - key is NULL or empty. |
| 242 | ** |
| 243 | ** Returns 0 on success. |
| 244 | ** |
| 245 | ** Ownership of v is transfered to (or shared with) g.json.gc, and v |
| 246 | ** will be valid until that object is cleaned up or some internal code |
| 247 | ** incorrectly removes it from the gc (which we never do). If this |
| 248 | ** function fails, it is fatal to the app (as it indicates an |
| 249 | ** allocation error (more likely than not) or a serious internal error |
| 250 | ** such as numeric overflow). |
| @@ -271,11 +271,11 @@ | |
| 271 | |
| 272 | |
| 273 | /* |
| 274 | ** Returns the value of json_rc_cstr(code) as a new JSON |
| 275 | ** string, which is owned by the caller and must eventually |
| 276 | ** be cson_value_free()d or transfered to a JSON container. |
| 277 | */ |
| 278 | cson_value * json_rc_string( int code ){ |
| 279 | return cson_value_new_string( json_rc_cstr(code), 11 ); |
| 280 | } |
| 281 | |
| @@ -864,11 +864,11 @@ | |
| 864 | /* |
| 865 | ** Splits zStr (which must not be NULL) into tokens separated by the |
| 866 | ** given separator character. If doDeHttp is true then each element |
| 867 | ** will be passed through dehttpize(), otherwise they are used |
| 868 | ** as-is. Note that tokenization happens before dehttpize(), |
| 869 | ** which is significant if the ENcoded tokens might contain the |
| 870 | ** separator character. |
| 871 | ** |
| 872 | ** Each new element is appended to the given target array object, |
| 873 | ** which must not be NULL and ownership of it is not changed by this |
| 874 | ** call. |
| @@ -1437,11 +1437,11 @@ | |
| 1437 | ** If payload is not NULL and resultCode is 0 then it is set as the |
| 1438 | ** "payload" property of the returned object. If resultCode is 0 then |
| 1439 | ** it defaults to g.json.resultCode. If resultCode is (or defaults to) |
| 1440 | ** non-zero and payload is not NULL then this function calls |
| 1441 | ** cson_value_free(payload) and does not insert the payload into the |
| 1442 | ** response. In either case, ownership of payload is transfered to (or |
| 1443 | ** shared with, if the caller holds a reference) this function. |
| 1444 | ** |
| 1445 | ** pMsg is an optional message string property (resultText) of the |
| 1446 | ** response. If resultCode is non-0 and pMsg is NULL then |
| 1447 | ** json_err_cstr() is used to get the error string. The caller may |
| 1448 |
| --- src/json.c | |
| +++ src/json.c | |
| @@ -240,11 +240,11 @@ | |
| 240 | ** - g.json.gc.a is NULL |
| 241 | ** - key is NULL or empty. |
| 242 | ** |
| 243 | ** Returns 0 on success. |
| 244 | ** |
| 245 | ** Ownership of v is transferred to (or shared with) g.json.gc, and v |
| 246 | ** will be valid until that object is cleaned up or some internal code |
| 247 | ** incorrectly removes it from the gc (which we never do). If this |
| 248 | ** function fails, it is fatal to the app (as it indicates an |
| 249 | ** allocation error (more likely than not) or a serious internal error |
| 250 | ** such as numeric overflow). |
| @@ -271,11 +271,11 @@ | |
| 271 | |
| 272 | |
| 273 | /* |
| 274 | ** Returns the value of json_rc_cstr(code) as a new JSON |
| 275 | ** string, which is owned by the caller and must eventually |
| 276 | ** be cson_value_free()d or transferred to a JSON container. |
| 277 | */ |
| 278 | cson_value * json_rc_string( int code ){ |
| 279 | return cson_value_new_string( json_rc_cstr(code), 11 ); |
| 280 | } |
| 281 | |
| @@ -864,11 +864,11 @@ | |
| 864 | /* |
| 865 | ** Splits zStr (which must not be NULL) into tokens separated by the |
| 866 | ** given separator character. If doDeHttp is true then each element |
| 867 | ** will be passed through dehttpize(), otherwise they are used |
| 868 | ** as-is. Note that tokenization happens before dehttpize(), |
| 869 | ** which is significant if the encoded tokens might contain the |
| 870 | ** separator character. |
| 871 | ** |
| 872 | ** Each new element is appended to the given target array object, |
| 873 | ** which must not be NULL and ownership of it is not changed by this |
| 874 | ** call. |
| @@ -1437,11 +1437,11 @@ | |
| 1437 | ** If payload is not NULL and resultCode is 0 then it is set as the |
| 1438 | ** "payload" property of the returned object. If resultCode is 0 then |
| 1439 | ** it defaults to g.json.resultCode. If resultCode is (or defaults to) |
| 1440 | ** non-zero and payload is not NULL then this function calls |
| 1441 | ** cson_value_free(payload) and does not insert the payload into the |
| 1442 | ** response. In either case, ownership of payload is transferred to (or |
| 1443 | ** shared with, if the caller holds a reference) this function. |
| 1444 | ** |
| 1445 | ** pMsg is an optional message string property (resultText) of the |
| 1446 | ** response. If resultCode is non-0 and pMsg is NULL then |
| 1447 | ** json_err_cstr() is used to get the error string. The caller may |
| 1448 |
+1
-1
| --- src/json_report.c | ||
| +++ src/json_report.c | ||
| @@ -155,11 +155,11 @@ | ||
| 155 | 155 | ** |
| 156 | 156 | ** report=int (CLI: -report # or -r #) is the report number to run. |
| 157 | 157 | ** |
| 158 | 158 | ** limit=int (CLI: -limit # or -n #) -n is for compat. with other commands. |
| 159 | 159 | ** |
| 160 | -** format=a|o Specifies result format: a=each row is an arry, o=each | |
| 160 | +** format=a|o Specifies result format: a=each row is an array, o=each | |
| 161 | 161 | ** row is an object. Default=o. |
| 162 | 162 | */ |
| 163 | 163 | static cson_value * json_report_run(void){ |
| 164 | 164 | int nReport; |
| 165 | 165 | Stmt q = empty_Stmt; |
| 166 | 166 |
| --- src/json_report.c | |
| +++ src/json_report.c | |
| @@ -155,11 +155,11 @@ | |
| 155 | ** |
| 156 | ** report=int (CLI: -report # or -r #) is the report number to run. |
| 157 | ** |
| 158 | ** limit=int (CLI: -limit # or -n #) -n is for compat. with other commands. |
| 159 | ** |
| 160 | ** format=a|o Specifies result format: a=each row is an arry, o=each |
| 161 | ** row is an object. Default=o. |
| 162 | */ |
| 163 | static cson_value * json_report_run(void){ |
| 164 | int nReport; |
| 165 | Stmt q = empty_Stmt; |
| 166 |
| --- src/json_report.c | |
| +++ src/json_report.c | |
| @@ -155,11 +155,11 @@ | |
| 155 | ** |
| 156 | ** report=int (CLI: -report # or -r #) is the report number to run. |
| 157 | ** |
| 158 | ** limit=int (CLI: -limit # or -n #) -n is for compat. with other commands. |
| 159 | ** |
| 160 | ** format=a|o Specifies result format: a=each row is an array, o=each |
| 161 | ** row is an object. Default=o. |
| 162 | */ |
| 163 | static cson_value * json_report_run(void){ |
| 164 | int nReport; |
| 165 | Stmt q = empty_Stmt; |
| 166 |
+6
-6
| --- src/login.c | ||
| +++ src/login.c | ||
| @@ -293,11 +293,11 @@ | ||
| 293 | 293 | ** |
| 294 | 294 | ** This function also updates the user.cookie, user.ipaddr, |
| 295 | 295 | ** and user.cexpire fields for the given user. |
| 296 | 296 | ** |
| 297 | 297 | ** If zDest is not NULL then the generated cookie is copied to |
| 298 | -** *zDdest and ownership is transfered to the caller (who should | |
| 298 | +** *zDdest and ownership is transferred to the caller (who should | |
| 299 | 299 | ** eventually pass it to free()). |
| 300 | 300 | ** |
| 301 | 301 | ** If bSessionCookie is true, the cookie will be a session cookie, |
| 302 | 302 | ** else a persistent cookie. If it's a session cookie, the |
| 303 | 303 | ** [user].[cexpire] and [user].[cookie] entries will be modified as if |
| @@ -379,11 +379,11 @@ | ||
| 379 | 379 | ** If bSessionCookie is true, the cookie will be a session cookie. |
| 380 | 380 | ** |
| 381 | 381 | ** Search for tag-20250817a to find the code that recognizes this cookie. |
| 382 | 382 | */ |
| 383 | 383 | void login_set_anon_cookie(char **zCookieDest, int bSessionCookie){ |
| 384 | - char *zNow; /* Current time (julian day number) */ | |
| 384 | + char *zNow; /* Current time (Julian day number) */ | |
| 385 | 385 | char *zCookie; /* The login cookie */ |
| 386 | 386 | const char *zUserAgent; /* The user agent */ |
| 387 | 387 | const char *zCookieName; /* Name of the login cookie */ |
| 388 | 388 | Blob b; /* Blob used during cookie construction */ |
| 389 | 389 | int expires = bSessionCookie ? 0 : anon_cookie_lifespan(); |
| @@ -1931,11 +1931,11 @@ | ||
| 1931 | 1931 | } |
| 1932 | 1932 | } |
| 1933 | 1933 | |
| 1934 | 1934 | /* |
| 1935 | 1935 | ** Call this routine if the user lacks g.perm.Hyperlink permission. If |
| 1936 | -** the anonymous user has Hyperlink permission, then paint a mesage | |
| 1936 | +** the anonymous user has Hyperlink permission, then paint a message | |
| 1937 | 1937 | ** to inform the user that much more information is available by |
| 1938 | 1938 | ** logging in as anonymous. |
| 1939 | 1939 | */ |
| 1940 | 1940 | void login_anonymous_available(void){ |
| 1941 | 1941 | if( !g.perm.Hyperlink && g.anon.Hyperlink && anon_cookie_lifespan()>0 ){ |
| @@ -1955,11 +1955,11 @@ | ||
| 1955 | 1955 | } |
| 1956 | 1956 | |
| 1957 | 1957 | /* |
| 1958 | 1958 | ** Check to see if the candidate username zUserID is already used. |
| 1959 | 1959 | ** Return 1 if it is already in use. Return 0 if the name is |
| 1960 | -** available for a self-registeration. | |
| 1960 | +** available for a self-registration. | |
| 1961 | 1961 | */ |
| 1962 | 1962 | static int login_self_choosen_userid_already_exists(const char *zUserID){ |
| 1963 | 1963 | int rc = db_exists( |
| 1964 | 1964 | "SELECT 1 FROM user WHERE login=%Q " |
| 1965 | 1965 | "UNION ALL " |
| @@ -2212,11 +2212,11 @@ | ||
| 2212 | 2212 | ); |
| 2213 | 2213 | if( db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM subscriber WHERE semail=%Q" |
| 2214 | 2214 | " AND sverified", zEAddr) ){ |
| 2215 | 2215 | /* This the case where the user was formerly a verified subscriber |
| 2216 | 2216 | ** and here they have also registered as a user as well. It is |
| 2217 | - ** not necessary to repeat the verfication step */ | |
| 2217 | + ** not necessary to repeat the verification step */ | |
| 2218 | 2218 | login_redirect_to_g(); |
| 2219 | 2219 | } |
| 2220 | 2220 | /* A verification email */ |
| 2221 | 2221 | pSender = alert_sender_new(0,0); |
| 2222 | 2222 | blob_init(&hdr,0,0); |
| @@ -2383,11 +2383,11 @@ | ||
| 2383 | 2383 | style_finish_page(); |
| 2384 | 2384 | return; |
| 2385 | 2385 | } |
| 2386 | 2386 | zEAddr = PDT("ea",""); |
| 2387 | 2387 | |
| 2388 | - /* Verify user imputs */ | |
| 2388 | + /* Verify user inputs */ | |
| 2389 | 2389 | if( !cgi_csrf_safe(1) || P("reqpwreset")==0 ){ |
| 2390 | 2390 | /* This is the initial display of the form. No processing or error |
| 2391 | 2391 | ** checking is to be done. Fall through into the form display |
| 2392 | 2392 | ** |
| 2393 | 2393 | ** cgi_csrf_safe(): Nothing interesting happens on this page without |
| 2394 | 2394 |
| --- src/login.c | |
| +++ src/login.c | |
| @@ -293,11 +293,11 @@ | |
| 293 | ** |
| 294 | ** This function also updates the user.cookie, user.ipaddr, |
| 295 | ** and user.cexpire fields for the given user. |
| 296 | ** |
| 297 | ** If zDest is not NULL then the generated cookie is copied to |
| 298 | ** *zDdest and ownership is transfered to the caller (who should |
| 299 | ** eventually pass it to free()). |
| 300 | ** |
| 301 | ** If bSessionCookie is true, the cookie will be a session cookie, |
| 302 | ** else a persistent cookie. If it's a session cookie, the |
| 303 | ** [user].[cexpire] and [user].[cookie] entries will be modified as if |
| @@ -379,11 +379,11 @@ | |
| 379 | ** If bSessionCookie is true, the cookie will be a session cookie. |
| 380 | ** |
| 381 | ** Search for tag-20250817a to find the code that recognizes this cookie. |
| 382 | */ |
| 383 | void login_set_anon_cookie(char **zCookieDest, int bSessionCookie){ |
| 384 | char *zNow; /* Current time (julian day number) */ |
| 385 | char *zCookie; /* The login cookie */ |
| 386 | const char *zUserAgent; /* The user agent */ |
| 387 | const char *zCookieName; /* Name of the login cookie */ |
| 388 | Blob b; /* Blob used during cookie construction */ |
| 389 | int expires = bSessionCookie ? 0 : anon_cookie_lifespan(); |
| @@ -1931,11 +1931,11 @@ | |
| 1931 | } |
| 1932 | } |
| 1933 | |
| 1934 | /* |
| 1935 | ** Call this routine if the user lacks g.perm.Hyperlink permission. If |
| 1936 | ** the anonymous user has Hyperlink permission, then paint a mesage |
| 1937 | ** to inform the user that much more information is available by |
| 1938 | ** logging in as anonymous. |
| 1939 | */ |
| 1940 | void login_anonymous_available(void){ |
| 1941 | if( !g.perm.Hyperlink && g.anon.Hyperlink && anon_cookie_lifespan()>0 ){ |
| @@ -1955,11 +1955,11 @@ | |
| 1955 | } |
| 1956 | |
| 1957 | /* |
| 1958 | ** Check to see if the candidate username zUserID is already used. |
| 1959 | ** Return 1 if it is already in use. Return 0 if the name is |
| 1960 | ** available for a self-registeration. |
| 1961 | */ |
| 1962 | static int login_self_choosen_userid_already_exists(const char *zUserID){ |
| 1963 | int rc = db_exists( |
| 1964 | "SELECT 1 FROM user WHERE login=%Q " |
| 1965 | "UNION ALL " |
| @@ -2212,11 +2212,11 @@ | |
| 2212 | ); |
| 2213 | if( db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM subscriber WHERE semail=%Q" |
| 2214 | " AND sverified", zEAddr) ){ |
| 2215 | /* This the case where the user was formerly a verified subscriber |
| 2216 | ** and here they have also registered as a user as well. It is |
| 2217 | ** not necessary to repeat the verfication step */ |
| 2218 | login_redirect_to_g(); |
| 2219 | } |
| 2220 | /* A verification email */ |
| 2221 | pSender = alert_sender_new(0,0); |
| 2222 | blob_init(&hdr,0,0); |
| @@ -2383,11 +2383,11 @@ | |
| 2383 | style_finish_page(); |
| 2384 | return; |
| 2385 | } |
| 2386 | zEAddr = PDT("ea",""); |
| 2387 | |
| 2388 | /* Verify user imputs */ |
| 2389 | if( !cgi_csrf_safe(1) || P("reqpwreset")==0 ){ |
| 2390 | /* This is the initial display of the form. No processing or error |
| 2391 | ** checking is to be done. Fall through into the form display |
| 2392 | ** |
| 2393 | ** cgi_csrf_safe(): Nothing interesting happens on this page without |
| 2394 |
| --- src/login.c | |
| +++ src/login.c | |
| @@ -293,11 +293,11 @@ | |
| 293 | ** |
| 294 | ** This function also updates the user.cookie, user.ipaddr, |
| 295 | ** and user.cexpire fields for the given user. |
| 296 | ** |
| 297 | ** If zDest is not NULL then the generated cookie is copied to |
| 298 | ** *zDdest and ownership is transferred to the caller (who should |
| 299 | ** eventually pass it to free()). |
| 300 | ** |
| 301 | ** If bSessionCookie is true, the cookie will be a session cookie, |
| 302 | ** else a persistent cookie. If it's a session cookie, the |
| 303 | ** [user].[cexpire] and [user].[cookie] entries will be modified as if |
| @@ -379,11 +379,11 @@ | |
| 379 | ** If bSessionCookie is true, the cookie will be a session cookie. |
| 380 | ** |
| 381 | ** Search for tag-20250817a to find the code that recognizes this cookie. |
| 382 | */ |
| 383 | void login_set_anon_cookie(char **zCookieDest, int bSessionCookie){ |
| 384 | char *zNow; /* Current time (Julian day number) */ |
| 385 | char *zCookie; /* The login cookie */ |
| 386 | const char *zUserAgent; /* The user agent */ |
| 387 | const char *zCookieName; /* Name of the login cookie */ |
| 388 | Blob b; /* Blob used during cookie construction */ |
| 389 | int expires = bSessionCookie ? 0 : anon_cookie_lifespan(); |
| @@ -1931,11 +1931,11 @@ | |
| 1931 | } |
| 1932 | } |
| 1933 | |
| 1934 | /* |
| 1935 | ** Call this routine if the user lacks g.perm.Hyperlink permission. If |
| 1936 | ** the anonymous user has Hyperlink permission, then paint a message |
| 1937 | ** to inform the user that much more information is available by |
| 1938 | ** logging in as anonymous. |
| 1939 | */ |
| 1940 | void login_anonymous_available(void){ |
| 1941 | if( !g.perm.Hyperlink && g.anon.Hyperlink && anon_cookie_lifespan()>0 ){ |
| @@ -1955,11 +1955,11 @@ | |
| 1955 | } |
| 1956 | |
| 1957 | /* |
| 1958 | ** Check to see if the candidate username zUserID is already used. |
| 1959 | ** Return 1 if it is already in use. Return 0 if the name is |
| 1960 | ** available for a self-registration. |
| 1961 | */ |
| 1962 | static int login_self_choosen_userid_already_exists(const char *zUserID){ |
| 1963 | int rc = db_exists( |
| 1964 | "SELECT 1 FROM user WHERE login=%Q " |
| 1965 | "UNION ALL " |
| @@ -2212,11 +2212,11 @@ | |
| 2212 | ); |
| 2213 | if( db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM subscriber WHERE semail=%Q" |
| 2214 | " AND sverified", zEAddr) ){ |
| 2215 | /* This the case where the user was formerly a verified subscriber |
| 2216 | ** and here they have also registered as a user as well. It is |
| 2217 | ** not necessary to repeat the verification step */ |
| 2218 | login_redirect_to_g(); |
| 2219 | } |
| 2220 | /* A verification email */ |
| 2221 | pSender = alert_sender_new(0,0); |
| 2222 | blob_init(&hdr,0,0); |
| @@ -2383,11 +2383,11 @@ | |
| 2383 | style_finish_page(); |
| 2384 | return; |
| 2385 | } |
| 2386 | zEAddr = PDT("ea",""); |
| 2387 | |
| 2388 | /* Verify user inputs */ |
| 2389 | if( !cgi_csrf_safe(1) || P("reqpwreset")==0 ){ |
| 2390 | /* This is the initial display of the form. No processing or error |
| 2391 | ** checking is to be done. Fall through into the form display |
| 2392 | ** |
| 2393 | ** cgi_csrf_safe(): Nothing interesting happens on this page without |
| 2394 |
+3
-3
| --- src/main.c | ||
| +++ src/main.c | ||
| @@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ | ||
| 63 | 63 | #ifdef HAVE_BACKTRACE |
| 64 | 64 | # include <execinfo.h> |
| 65 | 65 | #endif |
| 66 | 66 | |
| 67 | 67 | /* |
| 68 | -** Default length of a timeout for serving an HTTP request. Changable | |
| 68 | +** Default length of a timeout for serving an HTTP request. Changeable | |
| 69 | 69 | ** using the "--timeout N" command-line option or via "timeout: N" in the |
| 70 | 70 | ** CGI script. |
| 71 | 71 | */ |
| 72 | 72 | #ifndef FOSSIL_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT |
| 73 | 73 | # define FOSSIL_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT 600 /* 10 minutes */ |
| @@ -1190,11 +1190,11 @@ | ||
| 1190 | 1190 | ** list and this function immediately returns. The effect is to treat |
| 1191 | 1191 | ** all arguments after "--" as non-flags (conventionally used to |
| 1192 | 1192 | ** enable passing-in of filenames which start with a dash). |
| 1193 | 1193 | ** |
| 1194 | 1194 | ** This function must normally only be called one time per app |
| 1195 | -** invokation. The exception is commands which process their | |
| 1195 | +** invocation. The exception is commands which process their | |
| 1196 | 1196 | ** arguments, call this to confirm that there are no extraneous flags, |
| 1197 | 1197 | ** then modify the arguments list for forwarding to another |
| 1198 | 1198 | ** (sub)command (which itself will call this to confirm its own |
| 1199 | 1199 | ** arguments). |
| 1200 | 1200 | */ |
| @@ -1402,11 +1402,11 @@ | ||
| 1402 | 1402 | style_finish_page(); |
| 1403 | 1403 | } |
| 1404 | 1404 | |
| 1405 | 1405 | |
| 1406 | 1406 | /* |
| 1407 | -** Set the g.zBaseURL value to the full URL for the toplevel of | |
| 1407 | +** Set the g.zBaseURL value to the full URL for the top level of | |
| 1408 | 1408 | ** the fossil tree. Set g.zTop to g.zBaseURL without the |
| 1409 | 1409 | ** leading "http://" and the host and port. |
| 1410 | 1410 | ** |
| 1411 | 1411 | ** The g.zBaseURL is normally set based on HTTP_HOST and SCRIPT_NAME |
| 1412 | 1412 | ** environment variables. However, if zAltBase is not NULL then it |
| 1413 | 1413 |
| --- src/main.c | |
| +++ src/main.c | |
| @@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ | |
| 63 | #ifdef HAVE_BACKTRACE |
| 64 | # include <execinfo.h> |
| 65 | #endif |
| 66 | |
| 67 | /* |
| 68 | ** Default length of a timeout for serving an HTTP request. Changable |
| 69 | ** using the "--timeout N" command-line option or via "timeout: N" in the |
| 70 | ** CGI script. |
| 71 | */ |
| 72 | #ifndef FOSSIL_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT |
| 73 | # define FOSSIL_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT 600 /* 10 minutes */ |
| @@ -1190,11 +1190,11 @@ | |
| 1190 | ** list and this function immediately returns. The effect is to treat |
| 1191 | ** all arguments after "--" as non-flags (conventionally used to |
| 1192 | ** enable passing-in of filenames which start with a dash). |
| 1193 | ** |
| 1194 | ** This function must normally only be called one time per app |
| 1195 | ** invokation. The exception is commands which process their |
| 1196 | ** arguments, call this to confirm that there are no extraneous flags, |
| 1197 | ** then modify the arguments list for forwarding to another |
| 1198 | ** (sub)command (which itself will call this to confirm its own |
| 1199 | ** arguments). |
| 1200 | */ |
| @@ -1402,11 +1402,11 @@ | |
| 1402 | style_finish_page(); |
| 1403 | } |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 | |
| 1406 | /* |
| 1407 | ** Set the g.zBaseURL value to the full URL for the toplevel of |
| 1408 | ** the fossil tree. Set g.zTop to g.zBaseURL without the |
| 1409 | ** leading "http://" and the host and port. |
| 1410 | ** |
| 1411 | ** The g.zBaseURL is normally set based on HTTP_HOST and SCRIPT_NAME |
| 1412 | ** environment variables. However, if zAltBase is not NULL then it |
| 1413 |
| --- src/main.c | |
| +++ src/main.c | |
| @@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ | |
| 63 | #ifdef HAVE_BACKTRACE |
| 64 | # include <execinfo.h> |
| 65 | #endif |
| 66 | |
| 67 | /* |
| 68 | ** Default length of a timeout for serving an HTTP request. Changeable |
| 69 | ** using the "--timeout N" command-line option or via "timeout: N" in the |
| 70 | ** CGI script. |
| 71 | */ |
| 72 | #ifndef FOSSIL_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT |
| 73 | # define FOSSIL_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT 600 /* 10 minutes */ |
| @@ -1190,11 +1190,11 @@ | |
| 1190 | ** list and this function immediately returns. The effect is to treat |
| 1191 | ** all arguments after "--" as non-flags (conventionally used to |
| 1192 | ** enable passing-in of filenames which start with a dash). |
| 1193 | ** |
| 1194 | ** This function must normally only be called one time per app |
| 1195 | ** invocation. The exception is commands which process their |
| 1196 | ** arguments, call this to confirm that there are no extraneous flags, |
| 1197 | ** then modify the arguments list for forwarding to another |
| 1198 | ** (sub)command (which itself will call this to confirm its own |
| 1199 | ** arguments). |
| 1200 | */ |
| @@ -1402,11 +1402,11 @@ | |
| 1402 | style_finish_page(); |
| 1403 | } |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 | |
| 1406 | /* |
| 1407 | ** Set the g.zBaseURL value to the full URL for the top level of |
| 1408 | ** the fossil tree. Set g.zTop to g.zBaseURL without the |
| 1409 | ** leading "http://" and the host and port. |
| 1410 | ** |
| 1411 | ** The g.zBaseURL is normally set based on HTTP_HOST and SCRIPT_NAME |
| 1412 | ** environment variables. However, if zAltBase is not NULL then it |
| 1413 |
+2
-2
| --- src/manifest.c | ||
| +++ src/manifest.c | ||
| @@ -2994,11 +2994,11 @@ | ||
| 2994 | 2994 | KVP_STR(1, uuid, pF->zUuid); |
| 2995 | 2995 | KVP_STR(1, perm, pF->zPerm); |
| 2996 | 2996 | KVP_STR(1, rename, pF->zPrior); |
| 2997 | 2997 | blob_append_char(b, '}'); |
| 2998 | 2998 | } |
| 2999 | - /* Special case: model checkins with no F-card as having an empty | |
| 2999 | + /* Special case: model check-ins with no F-card as having an empty | |
| 3000 | 3000 | ** array, rather than no F-cards, to hypothetically simplify |
| 3001 | 3001 | ** handling in JSON queries. */ |
| 3002 | 3002 | blob_append_char(b, ']'); |
| 3003 | 3003 | } |
| 3004 | 3004 | CARD_STR2(G, p->zThreadRoot); |
| @@ -3038,11 +3038,11 @@ | ||
| 3038 | 3038 | blob_append_char(b, '['); |
| 3039 | 3039 | for( i = 0; i < p->nParent; ++i ){ |
| 3040 | 3040 | if( i>0 ) blob_append_char(b, ','); |
| 3041 | 3041 | blob_appendf(b, "%!j", p->azParent[i]); |
| 3042 | 3042 | } |
| 3043 | - /* Special case: model checkins with no P-card as having an empty | |
| 3043 | + /* Special case: model check-ins with no P-card as having an empty | |
| 3044 | 3044 | ** array, as per F-cards. */ |
| 3045 | 3045 | blob_append_char(b, ']'); |
| 3046 | 3046 | } |
| 3047 | 3047 | if( p->nCherrypick ){ |
| 3048 | 3048 | CARD_LETTER(Q); |
| 3049 | 3049 |
| --- src/manifest.c | |
| +++ src/manifest.c | |
| @@ -2994,11 +2994,11 @@ | |
| 2994 | KVP_STR(1, uuid, pF->zUuid); |
| 2995 | KVP_STR(1, perm, pF->zPerm); |
| 2996 | KVP_STR(1, rename, pF->zPrior); |
| 2997 | blob_append_char(b, '}'); |
| 2998 | } |
| 2999 | /* Special case: model checkins with no F-card as having an empty |
| 3000 | ** array, rather than no F-cards, to hypothetically simplify |
| 3001 | ** handling in JSON queries. */ |
| 3002 | blob_append_char(b, ']'); |
| 3003 | } |
| 3004 | CARD_STR2(G, p->zThreadRoot); |
| @@ -3038,11 +3038,11 @@ | |
| 3038 | blob_append_char(b, '['); |
| 3039 | for( i = 0; i < p->nParent; ++i ){ |
| 3040 | if( i>0 ) blob_append_char(b, ','); |
| 3041 | blob_appendf(b, "%!j", p->azParent[i]); |
| 3042 | } |
| 3043 | /* Special case: model checkins with no P-card as having an empty |
| 3044 | ** array, as per F-cards. */ |
| 3045 | blob_append_char(b, ']'); |
| 3046 | } |
| 3047 | if( p->nCherrypick ){ |
| 3048 | CARD_LETTER(Q); |
| 3049 |
| --- src/manifest.c | |
| +++ src/manifest.c | |
| @@ -2994,11 +2994,11 @@ | |
| 2994 | KVP_STR(1, uuid, pF->zUuid); |
| 2995 | KVP_STR(1, perm, pF->zPerm); |
| 2996 | KVP_STR(1, rename, pF->zPrior); |
| 2997 | blob_append_char(b, '}'); |
| 2998 | } |
| 2999 | /* Special case: model check-ins with no F-card as having an empty |
| 3000 | ** array, rather than no F-cards, to hypothetically simplify |
| 3001 | ** handling in JSON queries. */ |
| 3002 | blob_append_char(b, ']'); |
| 3003 | } |
| 3004 | CARD_STR2(G, p->zThreadRoot); |
| @@ -3038,11 +3038,11 @@ | |
| 3038 | blob_append_char(b, '['); |
| 3039 | for( i = 0; i < p->nParent; ++i ){ |
| 3040 | if( i>0 ) blob_append_char(b, ','); |
| 3041 | blob_appendf(b, "%!j", p->azParent[i]); |
| 3042 | } |
| 3043 | /* Special case: model check-ins with no P-card as having an empty |
| 3044 | ** array, as per F-cards. */ |
| 3045 | blob_append_char(b, ']'); |
| 3046 | } |
| 3047 | if( p->nCherrypick ){ |
| 3048 | CARD_LETTER(Q); |
| 3049 |
+4
-4
| --- src/markdown.c | ||
| +++ src/markdown.c | ||
| @@ -530,12 +530,12 @@ | ||
| 530 | 530 | } |
| 531 | 531 | } |
| 532 | 532 | |
| 533 | 533 | /* |
| 534 | 534 | ** data[*pI] should be a "`" character that introduces a code-span. |
| 535 | -** The code-span boundry mark can be any number of one or more "`" | |
| 536 | -** characters. We do not know the size of the boundry marker, only | |
| 535 | +** The code-span boundary mark can be any number of one or more "`" | |
| 536 | +** characters. We do not know the size of the boundary marker, only | |
| 537 | 537 | ** that there is at least one "`" at data[*pI]. |
| 538 | 538 | ** |
| 539 | 539 | ** This routine increases *pI to move it past the code-span, including |
| 540 | 540 | ** the closing boundary mark. Or, if the code-span is unterminated, |
| 541 | 541 | ** this routine moves *pI past the opening boundary mark only. |
| @@ -634,11 +634,11 @@ | ||
| 634 | 634 | ** punct alnum (*x yes no |
| 635 | 635 | ** alnum space a* no yes |
| 636 | 636 | ** alnum punct a*( no yes |
| 637 | 637 | ** alnum alnum a*x yes yes |
| 638 | 638 | ** |
| 639 | -** The following routines determine whether a delimitor is left | |
| 639 | +** The following routines determine whether a delimiter is left | |
| 640 | 640 | ** or right flanking. |
| 641 | 641 | */ |
| 642 | 642 | static int left_flanking(char before, char after){ |
| 643 | 643 | if( fossil_isspace(after) ) return 0; |
| 644 | 644 | if( fossil_isalnum(after) ) return 1; |
| @@ -2533,11 +2533,11 @@ | ||
| 2533 | 2533 | |
| 2534 | 2534 | /* failfast if data is too short */ |
| 2535 | 2535 | if( beg+5>=end ) return 0; |
| 2536 | 2536 | i = beg; |
| 2537 | 2537 | |
| 2538 | - /* footnote definition must start at the begining of a line */ | |
| 2538 | + /* footnote definition must start at the beginning of a line */ | |
| 2539 | 2539 | if( data[i]!='[' ) return 0; |
| 2540 | 2540 | i++; |
| 2541 | 2541 | if( data[i]!='^' ) return 0; |
| 2542 | 2542 | id_offset = ++i; |
| 2543 | 2543 | |
| 2544 | 2544 |
| --- src/markdown.c | |
| +++ src/markdown.c | |
| @@ -530,12 +530,12 @@ | |
| 530 | } |
| 531 | } |
| 532 | |
| 533 | /* |
| 534 | ** data[*pI] should be a "`" character that introduces a code-span. |
| 535 | ** The code-span boundry mark can be any number of one or more "`" |
| 536 | ** characters. We do not know the size of the boundry marker, only |
| 537 | ** that there is at least one "`" at data[*pI]. |
| 538 | ** |
| 539 | ** This routine increases *pI to move it past the code-span, including |
| 540 | ** the closing boundary mark. Or, if the code-span is unterminated, |
| 541 | ** this routine moves *pI past the opening boundary mark only. |
| @@ -634,11 +634,11 @@ | |
| 634 | ** punct alnum (*x yes no |
| 635 | ** alnum space a* no yes |
| 636 | ** alnum punct a*( no yes |
| 637 | ** alnum alnum a*x yes yes |
| 638 | ** |
| 639 | ** The following routines determine whether a delimitor is left |
| 640 | ** or right flanking. |
| 641 | */ |
| 642 | static int left_flanking(char before, char after){ |
| 643 | if( fossil_isspace(after) ) return 0; |
| 644 | if( fossil_isalnum(after) ) return 1; |
| @@ -2533,11 +2533,11 @@ | |
| 2533 | |
| 2534 | /* failfast if data is too short */ |
| 2535 | if( beg+5>=end ) return 0; |
| 2536 | i = beg; |
| 2537 | |
| 2538 | /* footnote definition must start at the begining of a line */ |
| 2539 | if( data[i]!='[' ) return 0; |
| 2540 | i++; |
| 2541 | if( data[i]!='^' ) return 0; |
| 2542 | id_offset = ++i; |
| 2543 | |
| 2544 |
| --- src/markdown.c | |
| +++ src/markdown.c | |
| @@ -530,12 +530,12 @@ | |
| 530 | } |
| 531 | } |
| 532 | |
| 533 | /* |
| 534 | ** data[*pI] should be a "`" character that introduces a code-span. |
| 535 | ** The code-span boundary mark can be any number of one or more "`" |
| 536 | ** characters. We do not know the size of the boundary marker, only |
| 537 | ** that there is at least one "`" at data[*pI]. |
| 538 | ** |
| 539 | ** This routine increases *pI to move it past the code-span, including |
| 540 | ** the closing boundary mark. Or, if the code-span is unterminated, |
| 541 | ** this routine moves *pI past the opening boundary mark only. |
| @@ -634,11 +634,11 @@ | |
| 634 | ** punct alnum (*x yes no |
| 635 | ** alnum space a* no yes |
| 636 | ** alnum punct a*( no yes |
| 637 | ** alnum alnum a*x yes yes |
| 638 | ** |
| 639 | ** The following routines determine whether a delimiter is left |
| 640 | ** or right flanking. |
| 641 | */ |
| 642 | static int left_flanking(char before, char after){ |
| 643 | if( fossil_isspace(after) ) return 0; |
| 644 | if( fossil_isalnum(after) ) return 1; |
| @@ -2533,11 +2533,11 @@ | |
| 2533 | |
| 2534 | /* failfast if data is too short */ |
| 2535 | if( beg+5>=end ) return 0; |
| 2536 | i = beg; |
| 2537 | |
| 2538 | /* footnote definition must start at the beginning of a line */ |
| 2539 | if( data[i]!='[' ) return 0; |
| 2540 | i++; |
| 2541 | if( data[i]!='^' ) return 0; |
| 2542 | id_offset = ++i; |
| 2543 | |
| 2544 |
+3
-3
| --- src/merge.c | ||
| +++ src/merge.c | ||
| @@ -794,11 +794,11 @@ | ||
| 794 | 794 | char vAncestor = 'p'; /* If P is an ancestor of V then 'p', else 'n' */ |
| 795 | 795 | const char *zVersion; /* The VERSION argument */ |
| 796 | 796 | int bMultiMerge = 0; /* True if there are two or more VERSION arguments */ |
| 797 | 797 | int nMerge = 0; /* Number of prior merges processed */ |
| 798 | 798 | int useUndo = 1; /* True to record changes in the undo log */ |
| 799 | - Stmt q; /* SQL statment used for merge processing */ | |
| 799 | + Stmt q; /* SQL statement used for merge processing */ | |
| 800 | 800 | |
| 801 | 801 | |
| 802 | 802 | /* Notation: |
| 803 | 803 | ** |
| 804 | 804 | ** V The current check-out |
| @@ -1044,11 +1044,11 @@ | ||
| 1044 | 1044 | } |
| 1045 | 1045 | if( showVfileFlag ) debug_show_vfile(); |
| 1046 | 1046 | |
| 1047 | 1047 | /* |
| 1048 | 1048 | ** The vfile.pathname field is used to match files against each other. The |
| 1049 | - ** FV table contains one row for each each unique filename in | |
| 1049 | + ** FV table contains one row for each unique filename in | |
| 1050 | 1050 | ** in the current check-out, the pivot, and the version being merged. |
| 1051 | 1051 | */ |
| 1052 | 1052 | db_multi_exec( |
| 1053 | 1053 | "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS fv;" |
| 1054 | 1054 | "CREATE TEMP TABLE fv(\n" |
| @@ -1564,11 +1564,11 @@ | ||
| 1564 | 1564 | zFullName = mprintf("%s%s", g.zLocalRoot, zName); |
| 1565 | 1565 | if( file_isfile_or_link(zFullName) |
| 1566 | 1566 | && !db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM fv WHERE fn=%Q", zName) ){ |
| 1567 | 1567 | /* Name of backup file with Original content */ |
| 1568 | 1568 | char *zOrig = file_newname(zFullName, "original", 1); |
| 1569 | - /* Backup previously unanaged file before to be overwritten */ | |
| 1569 | + /* Backup previously unmanaged file before being overwritten */ | |
| 1570 | 1570 | file_copy(zFullName, zOrig); |
| 1571 | 1571 | fossil_free(zOrig); |
| 1572 | 1572 | fossil_print("ADDED %s (overwrites an unmanaged file)", zName); |
| 1573 | 1573 | if( !dryRunFlag ) fossil_print(", original copy backed up locally"); |
| 1574 | 1574 | fossil_print("\n"); |
| 1575 | 1575 |
| --- src/merge.c | |
| +++ src/merge.c | |
| @@ -794,11 +794,11 @@ | |
| 794 | char vAncestor = 'p'; /* If P is an ancestor of V then 'p', else 'n' */ |
| 795 | const char *zVersion; /* The VERSION argument */ |
| 796 | int bMultiMerge = 0; /* True if there are two or more VERSION arguments */ |
| 797 | int nMerge = 0; /* Number of prior merges processed */ |
| 798 | int useUndo = 1; /* True to record changes in the undo log */ |
| 799 | Stmt q; /* SQL statment used for merge processing */ |
| 800 | |
| 801 | |
| 802 | /* Notation: |
| 803 | ** |
| 804 | ** V The current check-out |
| @@ -1044,11 +1044,11 @@ | |
| 1044 | } |
| 1045 | if( showVfileFlag ) debug_show_vfile(); |
| 1046 | |
| 1047 | /* |
| 1048 | ** The vfile.pathname field is used to match files against each other. The |
| 1049 | ** FV table contains one row for each each unique filename in |
| 1050 | ** in the current check-out, the pivot, and the version being merged. |
| 1051 | */ |
| 1052 | db_multi_exec( |
| 1053 | "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS fv;" |
| 1054 | "CREATE TEMP TABLE fv(\n" |
| @@ -1564,11 +1564,11 @@ | |
| 1564 | zFullName = mprintf("%s%s", g.zLocalRoot, zName); |
| 1565 | if( file_isfile_or_link(zFullName) |
| 1566 | && !db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM fv WHERE fn=%Q", zName) ){ |
| 1567 | /* Name of backup file with Original content */ |
| 1568 | char *zOrig = file_newname(zFullName, "original", 1); |
| 1569 | /* Backup previously unanaged file before to be overwritten */ |
| 1570 | file_copy(zFullName, zOrig); |
| 1571 | fossil_free(zOrig); |
| 1572 | fossil_print("ADDED %s (overwrites an unmanaged file)", zName); |
| 1573 | if( !dryRunFlag ) fossil_print(", original copy backed up locally"); |
| 1574 | fossil_print("\n"); |
| 1575 |
| --- src/merge.c | |
| +++ src/merge.c | |
| @@ -794,11 +794,11 @@ | |
| 794 | char vAncestor = 'p'; /* If P is an ancestor of V then 'p', else 'n' */ |
| 795 | const char *zVersion; /* The VERSION argument */ |
| 796 | int bMultiMerge = 0; /* True if there are two or more VERSION arguments */ |
| 797 | int nMerge = 0; /* Number of prior merges processed */ |
| 798 | int useUndo = 1; /* True to record changes in the undo log */ |
| 799 | Stmt q; /* SQL statement used for merge processing */ |
| 800 | |
| 801 | |
| 802 | /* Notation: |
| 803 | ** |
| 804 | ** V The current check-out |
| @@ -1044,11 +1044,11 @@ | |
| 1044 | } |
| 1045 | if( showVfileFlag ) debug_show_vfile(); |
| 1046 | |
| 1047 | /* |
| 1048 | ** The vfile.pathname field is used to match files against each other. The |
| 1049 | ** FV table contains one row for each unique filename in |
| 1050 | ** in the current check-out, the pivot, and the version being merged. |
| 1051 | */ |
| 1052 | db_multi_exec( |
| 1053 | "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS fv;" |
| 1054 | "CREATE TEMP TABLE fv(\n" |
| @@ -1564,11 +1564,11 @@ | |
| 1564 | zFullName = mprintf("%s%s", g.zLocalRoot, zName); |
| 1565 | if( file_isfile_or_link(zFullName) |
| 1566 | && !db_exists("SELECT 1 FROM fv WHERE fn=%Q", zName) ){ |
| 1567 | /* Name of backup file with Original content */ |
| 1568 | char *zOrig = file_newname(zFullName, "original", 1); |
| 1569 | /* Backup previously unmanaged file before being overwritten */ |
| 1570 | file_copy(zFullName, zOrig); |
| 1571 | fossil_free(zOrig); |
| 1572 | fossil_print("ADDED %s (overwrites an unmanaged file)", zName); |
| 1573 | if( !dryRunFlag ) fossil_print(", original copy backed up locally"); |
| 1574 | fossil_print("\n"); |
| 1575 |
+2
-2
| --- src/merge3.c | ||
| +++ src/merge3.c | ||
| @@ -175,11 +175,11 @@ | ||
| 175 | 175 | /* These are generic methods for MergeBuilder. They just output debugging |
| 176 | 176 | ** information. But some of them are useful as base methods for other useful |
| 177 | 177 | ** implementations of MergeBuilder. |
| 178 | 178 | */ |
| 179 | 179 | |
| 180 | -/* xStart() and xEnd() are called to generate header and fotter information | |
| 180 | +/* xStart() and xEnd() are called to generate header and footer information | |
| 181 | 181 | ** in the output. This is a no-op in the generic implementation. |
| 182 | 182 | */ |
| 183 | 183 | static void dbgStartEnd(MergeBuilder *p){ (void)p; } |
| 184 | 184 | |
| 185 | 185 | /* The next N lines of PIVOT are unchanged in both V1 and V2 |
| @@ -716,11 +716,11 @@ | ||
| 716 | 716 | */ |
| 717 | 717 | static int skip_conflict( |
| 718 | 718 | int *aC, /* Array of integer triples describing the edit */ |
| 719 | 719 | int i, /* Index in aC[] of current location */ |
| 720 | 720 | int sz, /* Lines of A that have been skipped */ |
| 721 | - unsigned int *pLn /* OUT: Lines of B to skip to keep aligment with A */ | |
| 721 | + unsigned int *pLn /* OUT: Lines of B to skip to keep alignment with A */ | |
| 722 | 722 | ){ |
| 723 | 723 | *pLn = 0; |
| 724 | 724 | while( sz>0 ){ |
| 725 | 725 | if( aC[i]==0 && aC[i+1]==0 && aC[i+2]==0 ) break; |
| 726 | 726 | if( aC[i]>=sz ){ |
| 727 | 727 |
| --- src/merge3.c | |
| +++ src/merge3.c | |
| @@ -175,11 +175,11 @@ | |
| 175 | /* These are generic methods for MergeBuilder. They just output debugging |
| 176 | ** information. But some of them are useful as base methods for other useful |
| 177 | ** implementations of MergeBuilder. |
| 178 | */ |
| 179 | |
| 180 | /* xStart() and xEnd() are called to generate header and fotter information |
| 181 | ** in the output. This is a no-op in the generic implementation. |
| 182 | */ |
| 183 | static void dbgStartEnd(MergeBuilder *p){ (void)p; } |
| 184 | |
| 185 | /* The next N lines of PIVOT are unchanged in both V1 and V2 |
| @@ -716,11 +716,11 @@ | |
| 716 | */ |
| 717 | static int skip_conflict( |
| 718 | int *aC, /* Array of integer triples describing the edit */ |
| 719 | int i, /* Index in aC[] of current location */ |
| 720 | int sz, /* Lines of A that have been skipped */ |
| 721 | unsigned int *pLn /* OUT: Lines of B to skip to keep aligment with A */ |
| 722 | ){ |
| 723 | *pLn = 0; |
| 724 | while( sz>0 ){ |
| 725 | if( aC[i]==0 && aC[i+1]==0 && aC[i+2]==0 ) break; |
| 726 | if( aC[i]>=sz ){ |
| 727 |
| --- src/merge3.c | |
| +++ src/merge3.c | |
| @@ -175,11 +175,11 @@ | |
| 175 | /* These are generic methods for MergeBuilder. They just output debugging |
| 176 | ** information. But some of them are useful as base methods for other useful |
| 177 | ** implementations of MergeBuilder. |
| 178 | */ |
| 179 | |
| 180 | /* xStart() and xEnd() are called to generate header and footer information |
| 181 | ** in the output. This is a no-op in the generic implementation. |
| 182 | */ |
| 183 | static void dbgStartEnd(MergeBuilder *p){ (void)p; } |
| 184 | |
| 185 | /* The next N lines of PIVOT are unchanged in both V1 and V2 |
| @@ -716,11 +716,11 @@ | |
| 716 | */ |
| 717 | static int skip_conflict( |
| 718 | int *aC, /* Array of integer triples describing the edit */ |
| 719 | int i, /* Index in aC[] of current location */ |
| 720 | int sz, /* Lines of A that have been skipped */ |
| 721 | unsigned int *pLn /* OUT: Lines of B to skip to keep alignment with A */ |
| 722 | ){ |
| 723 | *pLn = 0; |
| 724 | while( sz>0 ){ |
| 725 | if( aC[i]==0 && aC[i+1]==0 && aC[i+2]==0 ) break; |
| 726 | if( aC[i]>=sz ){ |
| 727 |
+6
-6
| --- src/printf.c | ||
| +++ src/printf.c | ||
| @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ | ||
| 13 | 13 | ** [email protected] |
| 14 | 14 | ** http://www.hwaci.com/drh/ |
| 15 | 15 | ** |
| 16 | 16 | ******************************************************************************* |
| 17 | 17 | ** |
| 18 | -** This file contains implementions of routines for formatting output | |
| 18 | +** This file contains implementations of routines for formatting output | |
| 19 | 19 | ** (ex: mprintf()) and for output to the console. |
| 20 | 20 | */ |
| 21 | 21 | #include "config.h" |
| 22 | 22 | #include "printf.h" |
| 23 | 23 | #if defined(_WIN32) |
| @@ -89,11 +89,11 @@ | ||
| 89 | 89 | #define etBLOB 11 /* Blob objects. %b */ |
| 90 | 90 | #define etBLOBSQL 12 /* Blob objects quoted for SQL. %B */ |
| 91 | 91 | #define etSQLESCAPE 13 /* Strings with '\'' doubled. %q */ |
| 92 | 92 | #define etSQLESCAPE2 14 /* Strings with '\'' doubled and enclosed in '', |
| 93 | 93 | NULL pointers replaced by SQL NULL. %Q */ |
| 94 | -#define etSQLESCAPE3 15 /* Double '"' characters within an indentifier. %w */ | |
| 94 | +#define etSQLESCAPE3 15 /* Double '"' characters within an identifier. %w */ | |
| 95 | 95 | #define etPOINTER 16 /* The %p conversion */ |
| 96 | 96 | #define etHTMLIZE 17 /* Make text safe for HTML */ |
| 97 | 97 | #define etHTTPIZE 18 /* Make text safe for HTTP. "/" encoded as %2f */ |
| 98 | 98 | #define etURLIZE 19 /* Make text safe for HTTP. "/" not encoded */ |
| 99 | 99 | #define etFOSSILIZE 20 /* The fossil header encoding format. */ |
| @@ -265,12 +265,12 @@ | ||
| 265 | 265 | ** configuration parameters. |
| 266 | 266 | ** |
| 267 | 267 | ** The altForm2 argument is true for "%!W" (with the "!" alternate-form-2 |
| 268 | 268 | ** flags) and is false for plain "%W". The ! flag indicates that the |
| 269 | 269 | ** formatting is for display of a check-in comment on the timeline. Such |
| 270 | -** comments used to be renderedd differently, but ever since 2020, they | |
| 271 | -** have been rendered identially, so the ! flag does not make any different | |
| 270 | +** comments used to be rendered differently, but ever since 2020, they | |
| 271 | +** have been rendered identically, so the ! flag does not make any different | |
| 272 | 272 | ** in the output any more. |
| 273 | 273 | */ |
| 274 | 274 | int wiki_convert_flags(int altForm2){ |
| 275 | 275 | static int wikiFlags = 0; |
| 276 | 276 | (void)altForm2; |
| @@ -1188,13 +1188,13 @@ | ||
| 1188 | 1188 | ** |
| 1189 | 1189 | ** The main difference between fossil_fatal() and fossil_panic() is that |
| 1190 | 1190 | ** fossil_panic() makes an entry in the error log whereas fossil_fatal() |
| 1191 | 1191 | ** does not. On POSIX platforms, if there is not an error log, then both |
| 1192 | 1192 | ** routines work similarly with respect to user-visible effects. Hence, |
| 1193 | -** the routines are interchangable for commands and only act differently | |
| 1193 | +** the routines are interchangeable for commands and only act differently | |
| 1194 | 1194 | ** when processing web pages. On the Windows platform, fossil_panic() |
| 1195 | -** also displays a pop-up stating that an error has occured and allowing | |
| 1195 | +** also displays a pop-up stating that an error has occurred and allowing | |
| 1196 | 1196 | ** just-in-time debugging to commence. On all platforms, fossil_panic() |
| 1197 | 1197 | ** ends execution with a SIGABRT signal, bypassing atexit processing. |
| 1198 | 1198 | ** This signal can also produce a core dump on POSIX platforms. |
| 1199 | 1199 | ** |
| 1200 | 1200 | ** Use fossil_fatal() for malformed inputs that should be reported back |
| 1201 | 1201 |
| --- src/printf.c | |
| +++ src/printf.c | |
| @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ | |
| 13 | ** [email protected] |
| 14 | ** http://www.hwaci.com/drh/ |
| 15 | ** |
| 16 | ******************************************************************************* |
| 17 | ** |
| 18 | ** This file contains implementions of routines for formatting output |
| 19 | ** (ex: mprintf()) and for output to the console. |
| 20 | */ |
| 21 | #include "config.h" |
| 22 | #include "printf.h" |
| 23 | #if defined(_WIN32) |
| @@ -89,11 +89,11 @@ | |
| 89 | #define etBLOB 11 /* Blob objects. %b */ |
| 90 | #define etBLOBSQL 12 /* Blob objects quoted for SQL. %B */ |
| 91 | #define etSQLESCAPE 13 /* Strings with '\'' doubled. %q */ |
| 92 | #define etSQLESCAPE2 14 /* Strings with '\'' doubled and enclosed in '', |
| 93 | NULL pointers replaced by SQL NULL. %Q */ |
| 94 | #define etSQLESCAPE3 15 /* Double '"' characters within an indentifier. %w */ |
| 95 | #define etPOINTER 16 /* The %p conversion */ |
| 96 | #define etHTMLIZE 17 /* Make text safe for HTML */ |
| 97 | #define etHTTPIZE 18 /* Make text safe for HTTP. "/" encoded as %2f */ |
| 98 | #define etURLIZE 19 /* Make text safe for HTTP. "/" not encoded */ |
| 99 | #define etFOSSILIZE 20 /* The fossil header encoding format. */ |
| @@ -265,12 +265,12 @@ | |
| 265 | ** configuration parameters. |
| 266 | ** |
| 267 | ** The altForm2 argument is true for "%!W" (with the "!" alternate-form-2 |
| 268 | ** flags) and is false for plain "%W". The ! flag indicates that the |
| 269 | ** formatting is for display of a check-in comment on the timeline. Such |
| 270 | ** comments used to be renderedd differently, but ever since 2020, they |
| 271 | ** have been rendered identially, so the ! flag does not make any different |
| 272 | ** in the output any more. |
| 273 | */ |
| 274 | int wiki_convert_flags(int altForm2){ |
| 275 | static int wikiFlags = 0; |
| 276 | (void)altForm2; |
| @@ -1188,13 +1188,13 @@ | |
| 1188 | ** |
| 1189 | ** The main difference between fossil_fatal() and fossil_panic() is that |
| 1190 | ** fossil_panic() makes an entry in the error log whereas fossil_fatal() |
| 1191 | ** does not. On POSIX platforms, if there is not an error log, then both |
| 1192 | ** routines work similarly with respect to user-visible effects. Hence, |
| 1193 | ** the routines are interchangable for commands and only act differently |
| 1194 | ** when processing web pages. On the Windows platform, fossil_panic() |
| 1195 | ** also displays a pop-up stating that an error has occured and allowing |
| 1196 | ** just-in-time debugging to commence. On all platforms, fossil_panic() |
| 1197 | ** ends execution with a SIGABRT signal, bypassing atexit processing. |
| 1198 | ** This signal can also produce a core dump on POSIX platforms. |
| 1199 | ** |
| 1200 | ** Use fossil_fatal() for malformed inputs that should be reported back |
| 1201 |
| --- src/printf.c | |
| +++ src/printf.c | |
| @@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ | |
| 13 | ** [email protected] |
| 14 | ** http://www.hwaci.com/drh/ |
| 15 | ** |
| 16 | ******************************************************************************* |
| 17 | ** |
| 18 | ** This file contains implementations of routines for formatting output |
| 19 | ** (ex: mprintf()) and for output to the console. |
| 20 | */ |
| 21 | #include "config.h" |
| 22 | #include "printf.h" |
| 23 | #if defined(_WIN32) |
| @@ -89,11 +89,11 @@ | |
| 89 | #define etBLOB 11 /* Blob objects. %b */ |
| 90 | #define etBLOBSQL 12 /* Blob objects quoted for SQL. %B */ |
| 91 | #define etSQLESCAPE 13 /* Strings with '\'' doubled. %q */ |
| 92 | #define etSQLESCAPE2 14 /* Strings with '\'' doubled and enclosed in '', |
| 93 | NULL pointers replaced by SQL NULL. %Q */ |
| 94 | #define etSQLESCAPE3 15 /* Double '"' characters within an identifier. %w */ |
| 95 | #define etPOINTER 16 /* The %p conversion */ |
| 96 | #define etHTMLIZE 17 /* Make text safe for HTML */ |
| 97 | #define etHTTPIZE 18 /* Make text safe for HTTP. "/" encoded as %2f */ |
| 98 | #define etURLIZE 19 /* Make text safe for HTTP. "/" not encoded */ |
| 99 | #define etFOSSILIZE 20 /* The fossil header encoding format. */ |
| @@ -265,12 +265,12 @@ | |
| 265 | ** configuration parameters. |
| 266 | ** |
| 267 | ** The altForm2 argument is true for "%!W" (with the "!" alternate-form-2 |
| 268 | ** flags) and is false for plain "%W". The ! flag indicates that the |
| 269 | ** formatting is for display of a check-in comment on the timeline. Such |
| 270 | ** comments used to be rendered differently, but ever since 2020, they |
| 271 | ** have been rendered identically, so the ! flag does not make any different |
| 272 | ** in the output any more. |
| 273 | */ |
| 274 | int wiki_convert_flags(int altForm2){ |
| 275 | static int wikiFlags = 0; |
| 276 | (void)altForm2; |
| @@ -1188,13 +1188,13 @@ | |
| 1188 | ** |
| 1189 | ** The main difference between fossil_fatal() and fossil_panic() is that |
| 1190 | ** fossil_panic() makes an entry in the error log whereas fossil_fatal() |
| 1191 | ** does not. On POSIX platforms, if there is not an error log, then both |
| 1192 | ** routines work similarly with respect to user-visible effects. Hence, |
| 1193 | ** the routines are interchangeable for commands and only act differently |
| 1194 | ** when processing web pages. On the Windows platform, fossil_panic() |
| 1195 | ** also displays a pop-up stating that an error has occurred and allowing |
| 1196 | ** just-in-time debugging to commence. On all platforms, fossil_panic() |
| 1197 | ** ends execution with a SIGABRT signal, bypassing atexit processing. |
| 1198 | ** This signal can also produce a core dump on POSIX platforms. |
| 1199 | ** |
| 1200 | ** Use fossil_fatal() for malformed inputs that should be reported back |
| 1201 |
+2
-2
| --- src/purge.c | ||
| +++ src/purge.c | ||
| @@ -62,11 +62,11 @@ | ||
| 62 | 62 | #define PURGE_EXPLAIN_ONLY 0x0002 /* Show what would have happened */ |
| 63 | 63 | #define PURGE_PRINT_SUMMARY 0x0004 /* Print a summary report at end */ |
| 64 | 64 | #endif |
| 65 | 65 | |
| 66 | 66 | /* |
| 67 | -** This routine purges multiple artifacts from the repository, transfering | |
| 67 | +** This routine purges multiple artifacts from the repository, transferring | |
| 68 | 68 | ** those artifacts into the PURGEITEM table. |
| 69 | 69 | ** |
| 70 | 70 | ** Prior to invoking this routine, the caller must create a (TEMP) table |
| 71 | 71 | ** named zTab that contains the RID of every artifact to be purged. |
| 72 | 72 | ** |
| @@ -256,11 +256,11 @@ | ||
| 256 | 256 | ** When bExclusive is false, then all artifacts used by the check-ins |
| 257 | 257 | ** are added even if those artifacts are also used by other check-ins |
| 258 | 258 | ** not in the set. |
| 259 | 259 | ** |
| 260 | 260 | ** The "fossil publish" command with the (undocumented) --test and |
| 261 | -** --exclusive options can be used for interactiving testing of this | |
| 261 | +** --exclusive options can be used for interactive testing of this | |
| 262 | 262 | ** function. |
| 263 | 263 | */ |
| 264 | 264 | void find_checkin_associates(const char *zTab, int bExclusive){ |
| 265 | 265 | db_begin_transaction(); |
| 266 | 266 | |
| 267 | 267 |
| --- src/purge.c | |
| +++ src/purge.c | |
| @@ -62,11 +62,11 @@ | |
| 62 | #define PURGE_EXPLAIN_ONLY 0x0002 /* Show what would have happened */ |
| 63 | #define PURGE_PRINT_SUMMARY 0x0004 /* Print a summary report at end */ |
| 64 | #endif |
| 65 | |
| 66 | /* |
| 67 | ** This routine purges multiple artifacts from the repository, transfering |
| 68 | ** those artifacts into the PURGEITEM table. |
| 69 | ** |
| 70 | ** Prior to invoking this routine, the caller must create a (TEMP) table |
| 71 | ** named zTab that contains the RID of every artifact to be purged. |
| 72 | ** |
| @@ -256,11 +256,11 @@ | |
| 256 | ** When bExclusive is false, then all artifacts used by the check-ins |
| 257 | ** are added even if those artifacts are also used by other check-ins |
| 258 | ** not in the set. |
| 259 | ** |
| 260 | ** The "fossil publish" command with the (undocumented) --test and |
| 261 | ** --exclusive options can be used for interactiving testing of this |
| 262 | ** function. |
| 263 | */ |
| 264 | void find_checkin_associates(const char *zTab, int bExclusive){ |
| 265 | db_begin_transaction(); |
| 266 | |
| 267 |
| --- src/purge.c | |
| +++ src/purge.c | |
| @@ -62,11 +62,11 @@ | |
| 62 | #define PURGE_EXPLAIN_ONLY 0x0002 /* Show what would have happened */ |
| 63 | #define PURGE_PRINT_SUMMARY 0x0004 /* Print a summary report at end */ |
| 64 | #endif |
| 65 | |
| 66 | /* |
| 67 | ** This routine purges multiple artifacts from the repository, transferring |
| 68 | ** those artifacts into the PURGEITEM table. |
| 69 | ** |
| 70 | ** Prior to invoking this routine, the caller must create a (TEMP) table |
| 71 | ** named zTab that contains the RID of every artifact to be purged. |
| 72 | ** |
| @@ -256,11 +256,11 @@ | |
| 256 | ** When bExclusive is false, then all artifacts used by the check-ins |
| 257 | ** are added even if those artifacts are also used by other check-ins |
| 258 | ** not in the set. |
| 259 | ** |
| 260 | ** The "fossil publish" command with the (undocumented) --test and |
| 261 | ** --exclusive options can be used for interactive testing of this |
| 262 | ** function. |
| 263 | */ |
| 264 | void find_checkin_associates(const char *zTab, int bExclusive){ |
| 265 | db_begin_transaction(); |
| 266 | |
| 267 |
+1
-1
| --- src/report.c | ||
| +++ src/report.c | ||
| @@ -447,11 +447,11 @@ | ||
| 447 | 447 | int rn; |
| 448 | 448 | const char *zTitle; /* Title of the report */ |
| 449 | 449 | const char *z; |
| 450 | 450 | const char *zOwner; /* Owner of the report */ |
| 451 | 451 | const char *zClrKey; /* Color key - used to add colors to lines */ |
| 452 | - char *zSQL; /* The SQL text that gnerates the report */ | |
| 452 | + char *zSQL; /* The SQL text that generates the report */ | |
| 453 | 453 | char *zErr = 0; /* An error message */ |
| 454 | 454 | const char *zDesc; /* Extra descriptive text about the report */ |
| 455 | 455 | const char *zMimetype; /* Mimetype for zDesc */ |
| 456 | 456 | const char *zTag; /* Symbolic name for this report */ |
| 457 | 457 | int dflt = P("dflt") ? 1 : 0; |
| 458 | 458 |
| --- src/report.c | |
| +++ src/report.c | |
| @@ -447,11 +447,11 @@ | |
| 447 | int rn; |
| 448 | const char *zTitle; /* Title of the report */ |
| 449 | const char *z; |
| 450 | const char *zOwner; /* Owner of the report */ |
| 451 | const char *zClrKey; /* Color key - used to add colors to lines */ |
| 452 | char *zSQL; /* The SQL text that gnerates the report */ |
| 453 | char *zErr = 0; /* An error message */ |
| 454 | const char *zDesc; /* Extra descriptive text about the report */ |
| 455 | const char *zMimetype; /* Mimetype for zDesc */ |
| 456 | const char *zTag; /* Symbolic name for this report */ |
| 457 | int dflt = P("dflt") ? 1 : 0; |
| 458 |
| --- src/report.c | |
| +++ src/report.c | |
| @@ -447,11 +447,11 @@ | |
| 447 | int rn; |
| 448 | const char *zTitle; /* Title of the report */ |
| 449 | const char *z; |
| 450 | const char *zOwner; /* Owner of the report */ |
| 451 | const char *zClrKey; /* Color key - used to add colors to lines */ |
| 452 | char *zSQL; /* The SQL text that generates the report */ |
| 453 | char *zErr = 0; /* An error message */ |
| 454 | const char *zDesc; /* Extra descriptive text about the report */ |
| 455 | const char *zMimetype; /* Mimetype for zDesc */ |
| 456 | const char *zTag; /* Symbolic name for this report */ |
| 457 | int dflt = P("dflt") ? 1 : 0; |
| 458 |
+2
-2
| --- src/schema.c | ||
| +++ src/schema.c | ||
| @@ -365,11 +365,11 @@ | ||
| 365 | 365 | @ -- Each artifact can have one or more tags. A tag |
| 366 | 366 | @ -- is defined by a row in the next table. |
| 367 | 367 | @ -- |
| 368 | 368 | @ -- Wiki pages are tagged with "wiki-NAME" where NAME is the name of |
| 369 | 369 | @ -- the wiki page. Tickets changes are tagged with "ticket-HASH" where |
| 370 | -@ -- HASH is the indentifier of the ticket. Tags used to assign symbolic | |
| 370 | +@ -- HASH is the identifier of the ticket. Tags used to assign symbolic | |
| 371 | 371 | @ -- names to baselines are branches are of the form "sym-NAME" where |
| 372 | 372 | @ -- NAME is the symbolic name. |
| 373 | 373 | @ -- |
| 374 | 374 | @ CREATE TABLE tag( |
| 375 | 375 | @ tagid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, -- Numeric tag ID |
| @@ -500,11 +500,11 @@ | ||
| 500 | 500 | ** Allowed values for MIMEtype codes |
| 501 | 501 | */ |
| 502 | 502 | #if INTERFACE |
| 503 | 503 | # define MT_NONE 0 /* unspecified */ |
| 504 | 504 | # define MT_WIKI 1 /* Wiki */ |
| 505 | -# define MT_MARKDOWN 2 /* Markdonw */ | |
| 505 | +# define MT_MARKDOWN 2 /* Markdown */ | |
| 506 | 506 | # define MT_UNKNOWN 3 /* unknown */ |
| 507 | 507 | # define ValidMTC(X) ((X)>=0 && (X)<=3) /* True if MIMEtype code is valid */ |
| 508 | 508 | #endif |
| 509 | 509 | |
| 510 | 510 | /* |
| 511 | 511 |
| --- src/schema.c | |
| +++ src/schema.c | |
| @@ -365,11 +365,11 @@ | |
| 365 | @ -- Each artifact can have one or more tags. A tag |
| 366 | @ -- is defined by a row in the next table. |
| 367 | @ -- |
| 368 | @ -- Wiki pages are tagged with "wiki-NAME" where NAME is the name of |
| 369 | @ -- the wiki page. Tickets changes are tagged with "ticket-HASH" where |
| 370 | @ -- HASH is the indentifier of the ticket. Tags used to assign symbolic |
| 371 | @ -- names to baselines are branches are of the form "sym-NAME" where |
| 372 | @ -- NAME is the symbolic name. |
| 373 | @ -- |
| 374 | @ CREATE TABLE tag( |
| 375 | @ tagid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, -- Numeric tag ID |
| @@ -500,11 +500,11 @@ | |
| 500 | ** Allowed values for MIMEtype codes |
| 501 | */ |
| 502 | #if INTERFACE |
| 503 | # define MT_NONE 0 /* unspecified */ |
| 504 | # define MT_WIKI 1 /* Wiki */ |
| 505 | # define MT_MARKDOWN 2 /* Markdonw */ |
| 506 | # define MT_UNKNOWN 3 /* unknown */ |
| 507 | # define ValidMTC(X) ((X)>=0 && (X)<=3) /* True if MIMEtype code is valid */ |
| 508 | #endif |
| 509 | |
| 510 | /* |
| 511 |
| --- src/schema.c | |
| +++ src/schema.c | |
| @@ -365,11 +365,11 @@ | |
| 365 | @ -- Each artifact can have one or more tags. A tag |
| 366 | @ -- is defined by a row in the next table. |
| 367 | @ -- |
| 368 | @ -- Wiki pages are tagged with "wiki-NAME" where NAME is the name of |
| 369 | @ -- the wiki page. Tickets changes are tagged with "ticket-HASH" where |
| 370 | @ -- HASH is the identifier of the ticket. Tags used to assign symbolic |
| 371 | @ -- names to baselines are branches are of the form "sym-NAME" where |
| 372 | @ -- NAME is the symbolic name. |
| 373 | @ -- |
| 374 | @ CREATE TABLE tag( |
| 375 | @ tagid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, -- Numeric tag ID |
| @@ -500,11 +500,11 @@ | |
| 500 | ** Allowed values for MIMEtype codes |
| 501 | */ |
| 502 | #if INTERFACE |
| 503 | # define MT_NONE 0 /* unspecified */ |
| 504 | # define MT_WIKI 1 /* Wiki */ |
| 505 | # define MT_MARKDOWN 2 /* Markdown */ |
| 506 | # define MT_UNKNOWN 3 /* unknown */ |
| 507 | # define ValidMTC(X) ((X)>=0 && (X)<=3) /* True if MIMEtype code is valid */ |
| 508 | #endif |
| 509 | |
| 510 | /* |
| 511 |
+2
-2
| --- src/search.c | ||
| +++ src/search.c | ||
| @@ -589,11 +589,11 @@ | ||
| 589 | 589 | ** or use "--highlight 91" to force it on. Change the argument to --highlight |
| 590 | 590 | ** to change the color. |
| 591 | 591 | ** |
| 592 | 592 | ** Options: |
| 593 | 593 | ** -a|--all Search everything |
| 594 | -** -c|--checkins Search checkin comments | |
| 594 | +** -c|--checkins Search check-in comments | |
| 595 | 595 | ** --docs Search embedded documentation |
| 596 | 596 | ** --forum Search forum posts |
| 597 | 597 | ** -h|--bi-help Search built-in help |
| 598 | 598 | ** --highlight N Used VT100 color N for matching text. 0 means "off". |
| 599 | 599 | ** -n|--limit N Limit output to N matches |
| @@ -2865,11 +2865,11 @@ | ||
| 2865 | 2865 | rc = fts5MatchinfoIter(pApi, pFts, p, fts5MatchinfoLocalCb); |
| 2866 | 2866 | } |
| 2867 | 2867 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ |
| 2868 | 2868 | sqlite3_result_error_code(pCtx, rc); |
| 2869 | 2869 | }else{ |
| 2870 | - /* No errors has occured, so return a copy of the array of integers. */ | |
| 2870 | + /* No error has occurred, so return a copy of the array of integers. */ | |
| 2871 | 2871 | int nByte = p->nRet * sizeof(u32); |
| 2872 | 2872 | sqlite3_result_blob(pCtx, (void*)p->aRet, nByte, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); |
| 2873 | 2873 | } |
| 2874 | 2874 | } |
| 2875 | 2875 | |
| 2876 | 2876 |
| --- src/search.c | |
| +++ src/search.c | |
| @@ -589,11 +589,11 @@ | |
| 589 | ** or use "--highlight 91" to force it on. Change the argument to --highlight |
| 590 | ** to change the color. |
| 591 | ** |
| 592 | ** Options: |
| 593 | ** -a|--all Search everything |
| 594 | ** -c|--checkins Search checkin comments |
| 595 | ** --docs Search embedded documentation |
| 596 | ** --forum Search forum posts |
| 597 | ** -h|--bi-help Search built-in help |
| 598 | ** --highlight N Used VT100 color N for matching text. 0 means "off". |
| 599 | ** -n|--limit N Limit output to N matches |
| @@ -2865,11 +2865,11 @@ | |
| 2865 | rc = fts5MatchinfoIter(pApi, pFts, p, fts5MatchinfoLocalCb); |
| 2866 | } |
| 2867 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ |
| 2868 | sqlite3_result_error_code(pCtx, rc); |
| 2869 | }else{ |
| 2870 | /* No errors has occured, so return a copy of the array of integers. */ |
| 2871 | int nByte = p->nRet * sizeof(u32); |
| 2872 | sqlite3_result_blob(pCtx, (void*)p->aRet, nByte, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); |
| 2873 | } |
| 2874 | } |
| 2875 | |
| 2876 |
| --- src/search.c | |
| +++ src/search.c | |
| @@ -589,11 +589,11 @@ | |
| 589 | ** or use "--highlight 91" to force it on. Change the argument to --highlight |
| 590 | ** to change the color. |
| 591 | ** |
| 592 | ** Options: |
| 593 | ** -a|--all Search everything |
| 594 | ** -c|--checkins Search check-in comments |
| 595 | ** --docs Search embedded documentation |
| 596 | ** --forum Search forum posts |
| 597 | ** -h|--bi-help Search built-in help |
| 598 | ** --highlight N Used VT100 color N for matching text. 0 means "off". |
| 599 | ** -n|--limit N Limit output to N matches |
| @@ -2865,11 +2865,11 @@ | |
| 2865 | rc = fts5MatchinfoIter(pApi, pFts, p, fts5MatchinfoLocalCb); |
| 2866 | } |
| 2867 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ |
| 2868 | sqlite3_result_error_code(pCtx, rc); |
| 2869 | }else{ |
| 2870 | /* No error has occurred, so return a copy of the array of integers. */ |
| 2871 | int nByte = p->nRet * sizeof(u32); |
| 2872 | sqlite3_result_blob(pCtx, (void*)p->aRet, nByte, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); |
| 2873 | } |
| 2874 | } |
| 2875 | |
| 2876 |
+1
-1
| --- src/security_audit.c | ||
| +++ src/security_audit.c | ||
| @@ -389,11 +389,11 @@ | ||
| 389 | 389 | @ <a href="setup_ulist">User Configuration</a> page in case we |
| 390 | 390 | @ ever reuse the letter for another purpose. |
| 391 | 391 | } |
| 392 | 392 | |
| 393 | 393 | /* If anonymous users are allowed to create new Wiki, then |
| 394 | - ** wiki moderation should be activated to pervent spam. | |
| 394 | + ** wiki moderation should be activated to prevent spam. | |
| 395 | 395 | */ |
| 396 | 396 | if( hasAnyCap(zAnonCap, "fk") ){ |
| 397 | 397 | if( db_get_boolean("modreq-wiki",0)==0 ){ |
| 398 | 398 | @ <li><p><b>WARNING:</b> |
| 399 | 399 | @ Anonymous users can create or edit wiki without moderation. |
| 400 | 400 |
| --- src/security_audit.c | |
| +++ src/security_audit.c | |
| @@ -389,11 +389,11 @@ | |
| 389 | @ <a href="setup_ulist">User Configuration</a> page in case we |
| 390 | @ ever reuse the letter for another purpose. |
| 391 | } |
| 392 | |
| 393 | /* If anonymous users are allowed to create new Wiki, then |
| 394 | ** wiki moderation should be activated to pervent spam. |
| 395 | */ |
| 396 | if( hasAnyCap(zAnonCap, "fk") ){ |
| 397 | if( db_get_boolean("modreq-wiki",0)==0 ){ |
| 398 | @ <li><p><b>WARNING:</b> |
| 399 | @ Anonymous users can create or edit wiki without moderation. |
| 400 |
| --- src/security_audit.c | |
| +++ src/security_audit.c | |
| @@ -389,11 +389,11 @@ | |
| 389 | @ <a href="setup_ulist">User Configuration</a> page in case we |
| 390 | @ ever reuse the letter for another purpose. |
| 391 | } |
| 392 | |
| 393 | /* If anonymous users are allowed to create new Wiki, then |
| 394 | ** wiki moderation should be activated to prevent spam. |
| 395 | */ |
| 396 | if( hasAnyCap(zAnonCap, "fk") ){ |
| 397 | if( db_get_boolean("modreq-wiki",0)==0 ){ |
| 398 | @ <li><p><b>WARNING:</b> |
| 399 | @ Anonymous users can create or edit wiki without moderation. |
| 400 |
+1
-1
| --- src/setupuser.c | ||
| +++ src/setupuser.c | ||
| @@ -617,11 +617,11 @@ | ||
| 617 | 617 | zLogin, zLogin |
| 618 | 618 | ); |
| 619 | 619 | zOldLogin = zLogin; |
| 620 | 620 | } |
| 621 | 621 | #if 0 |
| 622 | - /* Problem: when renaming a user we need to update the subcriber | |
| 622 | + /* Problem: when renaming a user we need to update the subscriber | |
| 623 | 623 | ** names to match but we cannot know from here if each member of |
| 624 | 624 | ** the login group has the subscriber tables, so we cannot blindly |
| 625 | 625 | ** include this SQL. */ |
| 626 | 626 | else if( fossil_strcmp(zLogin, zOldLogin)!=0 |
| 627 | 627 | && alert_tables_exist() ){ |
| 628 | 628 |
| --- src/setupuser.c | |
| +++ src/setupuser.c | |
| @@ -617,11 +617,11 @@ | |
| 617 | zLogin, zLogin |
| 618 | ); |
| 619 | zOldLogin = zLogin; |
| 620 | } |
| 621 | #if 0 |
| 622 | /* Problem: when renaming a user we need to update the subcriber |
| 623 | ** names to match but we cannot know from here if each member of |
| 624 | ** the login group has the subscriber tables, so we cannot blindly |
| 625 | ** include this SQL. */ |
| 626 | else if( fossil_strcmp(zLogin, zOldLogin)!=0 |
| 627 | && alert_tables_exist() ){ |
| 628 |
| --- src/setupuser.c | |
| +++ src/setupuser.c | |
| @@ -617,11 +617,11 @@ | |
| 617 | zLogin, zLogin |
| 618 | ); |
| 619 | zOldLogin = zLogin; |
| 620 | } |
| 621 | #if 0 |
| 622 | /* Problem: when renaming a user we need to update the subscriber |
| 623 | ** names to match but we cannot know from here if each member of |
| 624 | ** the login group has the subscriber tables, so we cannot blindly |
| 625 | ** include this SQL. */ |
| 626 | else if( fossil_strcmp(zLogin, zOldLogin)!=0 |
| 627 | && alert_tables_exist() ){ |
| 628 |
+1
-1
| --- src/sha1.c | ||
| +++ src/sha1.c | ||
| @@ -257,11 +257,11 @@ | ||
| 257 | 257 | for (i = 0; i < 20; i++) |
| 258 | 258 | digest[i] = (unsigned char) |
| 259 | 259 | ((context->state[i>>2] >> ((3-(i & 3)) * 8) ) & 255); |
| 260 | 260 | } |
| 261 | 261 | } |
| 262 | -#endif /* Built-in SHA1 implemenation */ | |
| 262 | +#endif /* Built-in SHA1 implementation */ | |
| 263 | 263 | |
| 264 | 264 | /* |
| 265 | 265 | ** Convert a digest into base-16. digest should be declared as |
| 266 | 266 | ** "unsigned char digest[20]" in the calling function. The SHA1 |
| 267 | 267 | ** digest is stored in the first 20 bytes. zBuf should |
| 268 | 268 |
| --- src/sha1.c | |
| +++ src/sha1.c | |
| @@ -257,11 +257,11 @@ | |
| 257 | for (i = 0; i < 20; i++) |
| 258 | digest[i] = (unsigned char) |
| 259 | ((context->state[i>>2] >> ((3-(i & 3)) * 8) ) & 255); |
| 260 | } |
| 261 | } |
| 262 | #endif /* Built-in SHA1 implemenation */ |
| 263 | |
| 264 | /* |
| 265 | ** Convert a digest into base-16. digest should be declared as |
| 266 | ** "unsigned char digest[20]" in the calling function. The SHA1 |
| 267 | ** digest is stored in the first 20 bytes. zBuf should |
| 268 |
| --- src/sha1.c | |
| +++ src/sha1.c | |
| @@ -257,11 +257,11 @@ | |
| 257 | for (i = 0; i < 20; i++) |
| 258 | digest[i] = (unsigned char) |
| 259 | ((context->state[i>>2] >> ((3-(i & 3)) * 8) ) & 255); |
| 260 | } |
| 261 | } |
| 262 | #endif /* Built-in SHA1 implementation */ |
| 263 | |
| 264 | /* |
| 265 | ** Convert a digest into base-16. digest should be declared as |
| 266 | ** "unsigned char digest[20]" in the calling function. The SHA1 |
| 267 | ** digest is stored in the first 20 bytes. zBuf should |
| 268 |
+1
-1
| --- src/skins.c | ||
| +++ src/skins.c | ||
| @@ -162,11 +162,11 @@ | ||
| 162 | 162 | ** 2) The "skin" display setting cookie or URL argument, in that |
| 163 | 163 | ** order. If the "skin" URL argument is provided and refers to a legal |
| 164 | 164 | ** skin then that will update the display cookie. If the skin name is |
| 165 | 165 | ** illegal it is silently ignored. |
| 166 | 166 | ** |
| 167 | -** 3) The built-in skin identfied by the "default-skin" setting, if such | |
| 167 | +** 3) The built-in skin identified by the "default-skin" setting, if such | |
| 168 | 168 | ** a setting exists and matches one of the built-in skin names. |
| 169 | 169 | ** |
| 170 | 170 | ** 4) Skin properties (settings "css", "details", "footer", "header", |
| 171 | 171 | ** and "js") from the CONFIG db table |
| 172 | 172 | ** |
| 173 | 173 |
| --- src/skins.c | |
| +++ src/skins.c | |
| @@ -162,11 +162,11 @@ | |
| 162 | ** 2) The "skin" display setting cookie or URL argument, in that |
| 163 | ** order. If the "skin" URL argument is provided and refers to a legal |
| 164 | ** skin then that will update the display cookie. If the skin name is |
| 165 | ** illegal it is silently ignored. |
| 166 | ** |
| 167 | ** 3) The built-in skin identfied by the "default-skin" setting, if such |
| 168 | ** a setting exists and matches one of the built-in skin names. |
| 169 | ** |
| 170 | ** 4) Skin properties (settings "css", "details", "footer", "header", |
| 171 | ** and "js") from the CONFIG db table |
| 172 | ** |
| 173 |
| --- src/skins.c | |
| +++ src/skins.c | |
| @@ -162,11 +162,11 @@ | |
| 162 | ** 2) The "skin" display setting cookie or URL argument, in that |
| 163 | ** order. If the "skin" URL argument is provided and refers to a legal |
| 164 | ** skin then that will update the display cookie. If the skin name is |
| 165 | ** illegal it is silently ignored. |
| 166 | ** |
| 167 | ** 3) The built-in skin identified by the "default-skin" setting, if such |
| 168 | ** a setting exists and matches one of the built-in skin names. |
| 169 | ** |
| 170 | ** 4) Skin properties (settings "css", "details", "footer", "header", |
| 171 | ** and "js") from the CONFIG db table |
| 172 | ** |
| 173 |
+1
-1
| --- src/smtp.c | ||
| +++ src/smtp.c | ||
| @@ -565,11 +565,11 @@ | ||
| 565 | 565 | ** Return 0 on success. Otherwise an error code. |
| 566 | 566 | */ |
| 567 | 567 | int smtp_send_msg( |
| 568 | 568 | SmtpSession *p, /* The SMTP server to which the message is sent */ |
| 569 | 569 | const char *zFrom, /* Who the message is from */ |
| 570 | - int nTo, /* Number of receipients */ | |
| 570 | + int nTo, /* Number of recipients */ | |
| 571 | 571 | const char **azTo, /* Email address of each recipient */ |
| 572 | 572 | const char *zMsg /* Body of the message */ |
| 573 | 573 | ){ |
| 574 | 574 | int i; |
| 575 | 575 | int iCode = 0; |
| 576 | 576 |
| --- src/smtp.c | |
| +++ src/smtp.c | |
| @@ -565,11 +565,11 @@ | |
| 565 | ** Return 0 on success. Otherwise an error code. |
| 566 | */ |
| 567 | int smtp_send_msg( |
| 568 | SmtpSession *p, /* The SMTP server to which the message is sent */ |
| 569 | const char *zFrom, /* Who the message is from */ |
| 570 | int nTo, /* Number of receipients */ |
| 571 | const char **azTo, /* Email address of each recipient */ |
| 572 | const char *zMsg /* Body of the message */ |
| 573 | ){ |
| 574 | int i; |
| 575 | int iCode = 0; |
| 576 |
| --- src/smtp.c | |
| +++ src/smtp.c | |
| @@ -565,11 +565,11 @@ | |
| 565 | ** Return 0 on success. Otherwise an error code. |
| 566 | */ |
| 567 | int smtp_send_msg( |
| 568 | SmtpSession *p, /* The SMTP server to which the message is sent */ |
| 569 | const char *zFrom, /* Who the message is from */ |
| 570 | int nTo, /* Number of recipients */ |
| 571 | const char **azTo, /* Email address of each recipient */ |
| 572 | const char *zMsg /* Body of the message */ |
| 573 | ){ |
| 574 | int i; |
| 575 | int iCode = 0; |
| 576 |
+1
-1
| --- src/sqlcmd.c | ||
| +++ src/sqlcmd.c | ||
| @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ | ||
| 168 | 168 | ** WARNING: |
| 169 | 169 | ** Do not instantiate these functions for any Fossil webpage or command |
| 170 | 170 | ** method other than the "fossil sql" command. If an attacker gains access |
| 171 | 171 | ** to these functions, he will be able to disable other defense mechanisms. |
| 172 | 172 | ** |
| 173 | -** This routines are for interactiving testing only. They are experimental | |
| 173 | +** This routines are for interactive testing only. They are experimental | |
| 174 | 174 | ** and undocumented (apart from this comments) and might go away or change |
| 175 | 175 | ** in future releases. |
| 176 | 176 | ** |
| 177 | 177 | ** 2020-11-29: These functions are now only available if the "fossil sql" |
| 178 | 178 | ** command is started with the --test option. |
| 179 | 179 |
| --- src/sqlcmd.c | |
| +++ src/sqlcmd.c | |
| @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ | |
| 168 | ** WARNING: |
| 169 | ** Do not instantiate these functions for any Fossil webpage or command |
| 170 | ** method other than the "fossil sql" command. If an attacker gains access |
| 171 | ** to these functions, he will be able to disable other defense mechanisms. |
| 172 | ** |
| 173 | ** This routines are for interactiving testing only. They are experimental |
| 174 | ** and undocumented (apart from this comments) and might go away or change |
| 175 | ** in future releases. |
| 176 | ** |
| 177 | ** 2020-11-29: These functions are now only available if the "fossil sql" |
| 178 | ** command is started with the --test option. |
| 179 |
| --- src/sqlcmd.c | |
| +++ src/sqlcmd.c | |
| @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ | |
| 168 | ** WARNING: |
| 169 | ** Do not instantiate these functions for any Fossil webpage or command |
| 170 | ** method other than the "fossil sql" command. If an attacker gains access |
| 171 | ** to these functions, he will be able to disable other defense mechanisms. |
| 172 | ** |
| 173 | ** This routines are for interactive testing only. They are experimental |
| 174 | ** and undocumented (apart from this comments) and might go away or change |
| 175 | ** in future releases. |
| 176 | ** |
| 177 | ** 2020-11-29: These functions are now only available if the "fossil sql" |
| 178 | ** command is started with the --test option. |
| 179 |
+5
-5
| --- src/style.c | ||
| +++ src/style.c | ||
| @@ -226,11 +226,11 @@ | ||
| 226 | 226 | ** |
| 227 | 227 | ** As a defense against robots, the action=ARG might instead by data-action=ARG |
| 228 | 228 | ** and javascript (href.js) added to the page so that the data-action= is |
| 229 | 229 | ** changed into action= after the page loads. Whether or not this happens |
| 230 | 230 | ** depends on if the user has the "h" privilege and whether or not the |
| 231 | -** auto-hyperlink setting is on. These setings determine the values of | |
| 231 | +** auto-hyperlink setting is on. These settings determine the values of | |
| 232 | 232 | ** variables g.perm.Hyperlink and g.jsHref. |
| 233 | 233 | ** |
| 234 | 234 | ** User has "h" auto-hyperlink g.perm.Hyperlink g.jsHref |
| 235 | 235 | ** ------------ -------------- ---------------- -------- |
| 236 | 236 | ** 1: 0 0 0 0 |
| @@ -913,14 +913,14 @@ | ||
| 913 | 913 | @ </script> |
| 914 | 914 | builtin_fulfill_js_requests(); |
| 915 | 915 | } |
| 916 | 916 | |
| 917 | 917 | /* |
| 918 | -** Transorm input string into a token that is safe for inclusion into | |
| 918 | +** Transform input string into a token that is safe for inclusion into | |
| 919 | 919 | ** class attribute. Digits and low-case letter are passed unchanged, |
| 920 | 920 | ** upper-case letters are transformed to low-case, everything else is |
| 921 | -** tranformed into hyphens; consequtive and pending hyphens are squeezed. | |
| 921 | +** transformed into hyphens; consecutive and pending hyphens are squeezed. | |
| 922 | 922 | ** If result does not fit into szOut chars then it is truncated. |
| 923 | 923 | ** Result is always terminated with null. |
| 924 | 924 | */ |
| 925 | 925 | void style_derive_classname(const char *zIn, char *zOut, int szOut){ |
| 926 | 926 | assert( zOut ); |
| @@ -1219,11 +1219,11 @@ | ||
| 1219 | 1219 | |
| 1220 | 1220 | /* |
| 1221 | 1221 | ** Check for "name" or "page" query parameters on an /style.css |
| 1222 | 1222 | ** page request. If present, then page-specific CSS is requested, |
| 1223 | 1223 | ** so add that CSS to pOut. If the "name" and "page" query parameters |
| 1224 | -** are omitted, then pOut is unchnaged. | |
| 1224 | +** are omitted, then pOut is unchanged. | |
| 1225 | 1225 | */ |
| 1226 | 1226 | static void page_style_css_append_page_style(Blob *pOut){ |
| 1227 | 1227 | const char *zPage = PD("name",P("page")); |
| 1228 | 1228 | char * zFile; |
| 1229 | 1229 | int nFile = 0; |
| @@ -1252,11 +1252,11 @@ | ||
| 1252 | 1252 | } |
| 1253 | 1253 | |
| 1254 | 1254 | /* |
| 1255 | 1255 | ** WEBPAGE: style.css loadavg-exempt |
| 1256 | 1256 | ** |
| 1257 | -** Return the style sheet. The style sheet is assemblied from | |
| 1257 | +** Return the style sheet. The style sheet is assembled from | |
| 1258 | 1258 | ** multiple sources, in order: |
| 1259 | 1259 | ** |
| 1260 | 1260 | ** (1) The built-in "default.css" style sheet containing basic defaults. |
| 1261 | 1261 | ** |
| 1262 | 1262 | ** (2) The page-specific style sheet taken from the built-in |
| 1263 | 1263 |
| --- src/style.c | |
| +++ src/style.c | |
| @@ -226,11 +226,11 @@ | |
| 226 | ** |
| 227 | ** As a defense against robots, the action=ARG might instead by data-action=ARG |
| 228 | ** and javascript (href.js) added to the page so that the data-action= is |
| 229 | ** changed into action= after the page loads. Whether or not this happens |
| 230 | ** depends on if the user has the "h" privilege and whether or not the |
| 231 | ** auto-hyperlink setting is on. These setings determine the values of |
| 232 | ** variables g.perm.Hyperlink and g.jsHref. |
| 233 | ** |
| 234 | ** User has "h" auto-hyperlink g.perm.Hyperlink g.jsHref |
| 235 | ** ------------ -------------- ---------------- -------- |
| 236 | ** 1: 0 0 0 0 |
| @@ -913,14 +913,14 @@ | |
| 913 | @ </script> |
| 914 | builtin_fulfill_js_requests(); |
| 915 | } |
| 916 | |
| 917 | /* |
| 918 | ** Transorm input string into a token that is safe for inclusion into |
| 919 | ** class attribute. Digits and low-case letter are passed unchanged, |
| 920 | ** upper-case letters are transformed to low-case, everything else is |
| 921 | ** tranformed into hyphens; consequtive and pending hyphens are squeezed. |
| 922 | ** If result does not fit into szOut chars then it is truncated. |
| 923 | ** Result is always terminated with null. |
| 924 | */ |
| 925 | void style_derive_classname(const char *zIn, char *zOut, int szOut){ |
| 926 | assert( zOut ); |
| @@ -1219,11 +1219,11 @@ | |
| 1219 | |
| 1220 | /* |
| 1221 | ** Check for "name" or "page" query parameters on an /style.css |
| 1222 | ** page request. If present, then page-specific CSS is requested, |
| 1223 | ** so add that CSS to pOut. If the "name" and "page" query parameters |
| 1224 | ** are omitted, then pOut is unchnaged. |
| 1225 | */ |
| 1226 | static void page_style_css_append_page_style(Blob *pOut){ |
| 1227 | const char *zPage = PD("name",P("page")); |
| 1228 | char * zFile; |
| 1229 | int nFile = 0; |
| @@ -1252,11 +1252,11 @@ | |
| 1252 | } |
| 1253 | |
| 1254 | /* |
| 1255 | ** WEBPAGE: style.css loadavg-exempt |
| 1256 | ** |
| 1257 | ** Return the style sheet. The style sheet is assemblied from |
| 1258 | ** multiple sources, in order: |
| 1259 | ** |
| 1260 | ** (1) The built-in "default.css" style sheet containing basic defaults. |
| 1261 | ** |
| 1262 | ** (2) The page-specific style sheet taken from the built-in |
| 1263 |
| --- src/style.c | |
| +++ src/style.c | |
| @@ -226,11 +226,11 @@ | |
| 226 | ** |
| 227 | ** As a defense against robots, the action=ARG might instead by data-action=ARG |
| 228 | ** and javascript (href.js) added to the page so that the data-action= is |
| 229 | ** changed into action= after the page loads. Whether or not this happens |
| 230 | ** depends on if the user has the "h" privilege and whether or not the |
| 231 | ** auto-hyperlink setting is on. These settings determine the values of |
| 232 | ** variables g.perm.Hyperlink and g.jsHref. |
| 233 | ** |
| 234 | ** User has "h" auto-hyperlink g.perm.Hyperlink g.jsHref |
| 235 | ** ------------ -------------- ---------------- -------- |
| 236 | ** 1: 0 0 0 0 |
| @@ -913,14 +913,14 @@ | |
| 913 | @ </script> |
| 914 | builtin_fulfill_js_requests(); |
| 915 | } |
| 916 | |
| 917 | /* |
| 918 | ** Transform input string into a token that is safe for inclusion into |
| 919 | ** class attribute. Digits and low-case letter are passed unchanged, |
| 920 | ** upper-case letters are transformed to low-case, everything else is |
| 921 | ** transformed into hyphens; consecutive and pending hyphens are squeezed. |
| 922 | ** If result does not fit into szOut chars then it is truncated. |
| 923 | ** Result is always terminated with null. |
| 924 | */ |
| 925 | void style_derive_classname(const char *zIn, char *zOut, int szOut){ |
| 926 | assert( zOut ); |
| @@ -1219,11 +1219,11 @@ | |
| 1219 | |
| 1220 | /* |
| 1221 | ** Check for "name" or "page" query parameters on an /style.css |
| 1222 | ** page request. If present, then page-specific CSS is requested, |
| 1223 | ** so add that CSS to pOut. If the "name" and "page" query parameters |
| 1224 | ** are omitted, then pOut is unchanged. |
| 1225 | */ |
| 1226 | static void page_style_css_append_page_style(Blob *pOut){ |
| 1227 | const char *zPage = PD("name",P("page")); |
| 1228 | char * zFile; |
| 1229 | int nFile = 0; |
| @@ -1252,11 +1252,11 @@ | |
| 1252 | } |
| 1253 | |
| 1254 | /* |
| 1255 | ** WEBPAGE: style.css loadavg-exempt |
| 1256 | ** |
| 1257 | ** Return the style sheet. The style sheet is assembled from |
| 1258 | ** multiple sources, in order: |
| 1259 | ** |
| 1260 | ** (1) The built-in "default.css" style sheet containing basic defaults. |
| 1261 | ** |
| 1262 | ** (2) The page-specific style sheet taken from the built-in |
| 1263 |
+1
-1
| --- src/sync.c | ||
| +++ src/sync.c | ||
| @@ -307,11 +307,11 @@ | ||
| 307 | 307 | ** URL is the server name. PAYLOAD is the name of a temporary file |
| 308 | 308 | ** that will contain the xfer-protocol payload to send to the server. |
| 309 | 309 | ** REPLY is a temporary filename in which COMMAND should write the |
| 310 | 310 | ** content of the reply from the server. |
| 311 | 311 | ** |
| 312 | - ** CMD is reponsible for HTTP redirects. The following Fossil command | |
| 312 | + ** CMD is responsible for HTTP redirects. The following Fossil command | |
| 313 | 313 | ** can be used for CMD to achieve a working sync: |
| 314 | 314 | ** |
| 315 | 315 | ** fossil test-httpmsg --xfer |
| 316 | 316 | */ |
| 317 | 317 | g.zHttpCmd = find_option("transport-command",0,1); |
| 318 | 318 |
| --- src/sync.c | |
| +++ src/sync.c | |
| @@ -307,11 +307,11 @@ | |
| 307 | ** URL is the server name. PAYLOAD is the name of a temporary file |
| 308 | ** that will contain the xfer-protocol payload to send to the server. |
| 309 | ** REPLY is a temporary filename in which COMMAND should write the |
| 310 | ** content of the reply from the server. |
| 311 | ** |
| 312 | ** CMD is reponsible for HTTP redirects. The following Fossil command |
| 313 | ** can be used for CMD to achieve a working sync: |
| 314 | ** |
| 315 | ** fossil test-httpmsg --xfer |
| 316 | */ |
| 317 | g.zHttpCmd = find_option("transport-command",0,1); |
| 318 |
| --- src/sync.c | |
| +++ src/sync.c | |
| @@ -307,11 +307,11 @@ | |
| 307 | ** URL is the server name. PAYLOAD is the name of a temporary file |
| 308 | ** that will contain the xfer-protocol payload to send to the server. |
| 309 | ** REPLY is a temporary filename in which COMMAND should write the |
| 310 | ** content of the reply from the server. |
| 311 | ** |
| 312 | ** CMD is responsible for HTTP redirects. The following Fossil command |
| 313 | ** can be used for CMD to achieve a working sync: |
| 314 | ** |
| 315 | ** fossil test-httpmsg --xfer |
| 316 | */ |
| 317 | g.zHttpCmd = find_option("transport-command",0,1); |
| 318 |
+2
-2
| --- src/tar.c | ||
| +++ src/tar.c | ||
| @@ -809,11 +809,11 @@ | ||
| 809 | 809 | ** /tarball/fossil-20251018193920-d6c9aee97df.tar.gz |
| 810 | 810 | ** |
| 811 | 811 | ** In other words, filename itself contains sufficient information to |
| 812 | 812 | ** uniquely identify the check-in, including a timestamp of the form |
| 813 | 813 | ** YYYYMMDDHHMMSS and a prefix of the check-in hash. The timestamp |
| 814 | -** and hash must immediately preceed the first "." in the name. | |
| 814 | +** and hash must immediately precede the first "." in the name. | |
| 815 | 815 | */ |
| 816 | 816 | char *tar_uuid_from_name(char **pzName){ |
| 817 | 817 | char *zName = *pzName; /* Original input */ |
| 818 | 818 | int n1 = 0; /* Bytes in first prefix (tag-name) */ |
| 819 | 819 | int n2 = 0; /* Bytes in second prefix (check-in-name) */ |
| @@ -1167,11 +1167,11 @@ | ||
| 1167 | 1167 | &azItem, &anItem, &nItem); |
| 1168 | 1168 | bPlainTextCom = db_get_boolean("timeline-plaintext",0); |
| 1169 | 1169 | for(i=0; i<nItem-3; i+=4){ |
| 1170 | 1170 | int cnt; /* The number of instances of zLabel to use */ |
| 1171 | 1171 | char *zLabel; /* The label to match */ |
| 1172 | - double rStart; /* Starting time, julian day number */ | |
| 1172 | + double rStart; /* Starting time, Julian day number */ | |
| 1173 | 1173 | char *zComment = 0; /* Comment to apply */ |
| 1174 | 1174 | if( anItem[i]==1 && azItem[i][0]=='*' ){ |
| 1175 | 1175 | cnt = -1; |
| 1176 | 1176 | }else if( anItem[i]<1 ){ |
| 1177 | 1177 | cnt = 0; |
| 1178 | 1178 |
| --- src/tar.c | |
| +++ src/tar.c | |
| @@ -809,11 +809,11 @@ | |
| 809 | ** /tarball/fossil-20251018193920-d6c9aee97df.tar.gz |
| 810 | ** |
| 811 | ** In other words, filename itself contains sufficient information to |
| 812 | ** uniquely identify the check-in, including a timestamp of the form |
| 813 | ** YYYYMMDDHHMMSS and a prefix of the check-in hash. The timestamp |
| 814 | ** and hash must immediately preceed the first "." in the name. |
| 815 | */ |
| 816 | char *tar_uuid_from_name(char **pzName){ |
| 817 | char *zName = *pzName; /* Original input */ |
| 818 | int n1 = 0; /* Bytes in first prefix (tag-name) */ |
| 819 | int n2 = 0; /* Bytes in second prefix (check-in-name) */ |
| @@ -1167,11 +1167,11 @@ | |
| 1167 | &azItem, &anItem, &nItem); |
| 1168 | bPlainTextCom = db_get_boolean("timeline-plaintext",0); |
| 1169 | for(i=0; i<nItem-3; i+=4){ |
| 1170 | int cnt; /* The number of instances of zLabel to use */ |
| 1171 | char *zLabel; /* The label to match */ |
| 1172 | double rStart; /* Starting time, julian day number */ |
| 1173 | char *zComment = 0; /* Comment to apply */ |
| 1174 | if( anItem[i]==1 && azItem[i][0]=='*' ){ |
| 1175 | cnt = -1; |
| 1176 | }else if( anItem[i]<1 ){ |
| 1177 | cnt = 0; |
| 1178 |
| --- src/tar.c | |
| +++ src/tar.c | |
| @@ -809,11 +809,11 @@ | |
| 809 | ** /tarball/fossil-20251018193920-d6c9aee97df.tar.gz |
| 810 | ** |
| 811 | ** In other words, filename itself contains sufficient information to |
| 812 | ** uniquely identify the check-in, including a timestamp of the form |
| 813 | ** YYYYMMDDHHMMSS and a prefix of the check-in hash. The timestamp |
| 814 | ** and hash must immediately precede the first "." in the name. |
| 815 | */ |
| 816 | char *tar_uuid_from_name(char **pzName){ |
| 817 | char *zName = *pzName; /* Original input */ |
| 818 | int n1 = 0; /* Bytes in first prefix (tag-name) */ |
| 819 | int n2 = 0; /* Bytes in second prefix (check-in-name) */ |
| @@ -1167,11 +1167,11 @@ | |
| 1167 | &azItem, &anItem, &nItem); |
| 1168 | bPlainTextCom = db_get_boolean("timeline-plaintext",0); |
| 1169 | for(i=0; i<nItem-3; i+=4){ |
| 1170 | int cnt; /* The number of instances of zLabel to use */ |
| 1171 | char *zLabel; /* The label to match */ |
| 1172 | double rStart; /* Starting time, Julian day number */ |
| 1173 | char *zComment = 0; /* Comment to apply */ |
| 1174 | if( anItem[i]==1 && azItem[i][0]=='*' ){ |
| 1175 | cnt = -1; |
| 1176 | }else if( anItem[i]<1 ){ |
| 1177 | cnt = 0; |
| 1178 |
+1
-1
| --- src/terminal.c | ||
| +++ src/terminal.c | ||
| @@ -45,11 +45,11 @@ | ||
| 45 | 45 | #endif |
| 46 | 46 | |
| 47 | 47 | |
| 48 | 48 | /* Get the current terminal size by calling a system service. |
| 49 | 49 | ** |
| 50 | -** Return 1 on success. This sets the size parameters to the values retured by | |
| 50 | +** Return 1 on success. This sets the size parameters to the values returned by | |
| 51 | 51 | ** the system call, when such is supported; set the size to zero otherwise. |
| 52 | 52 | ** Return 0 on the system service call failure. |
| 53 | 53 | ** |
| 54 | 54 | ** Under Linux/bash the size info is also available from env $LINES, $COLUMNS. |
| 55 | 55 | ** Or it can be queried using tput `echo -e "lines\ncols"|tput -S`. |
| 56 | 56 |
| --- src/terminal.c | |
| +++ src/terminal.c | |
| @@ -45,11 +45,11 @@ | |
| 45 | #endif |
| 46 | |
| 47 | |
| 48 | /* Get the current terminal size by calling a system service. |
| 49 | ** |
| 50 | ** Return 1 on success. This sets the size parameters to the values retured by |
| 51 | ** the system call, when such is supported; set the size to zero otherwise. |
| 52 | ** Return 0 on the system service call failure. |
| 53 | ** |
| 54 | ** Under Linux/bash the size info is also available from env $LINES, $COLUMNS. |
| 55 | ** Or it can be queried using tput `echo -e "lines\ncols"|tput -S`. |
| 56 |
| --- src/terminal.c | |
| +++ src/terminal.c | |
| @@ -45,11 +45,11 @@ | |
| 45 | #endif |
| 46 | |
| 47 | |
| 48 | /* Get the current terminal size by calling a system service. |
| 49 | ** |
| 50 | ** Return 1 on success. This sets the size parameters to the values returned by |
| 51 | ** the system call, when such is supported; set the size to zero otherwise. |
| 52 | ** Return 0 on the system service call failure. |
| 53 | ** |
| 54 | ** Under Linux/bash the size info is also available from env $LINES, $COLUMNS. |
| 55 | ** Or it can be queried using tput `echo -e "lines\ncols"|tput -S`. |
| 56 |
M
src/th.c
+1
-1
| --- src/th.c | ||
| +++ src/th.c | ||
| @@ -1029,11 +1029,11 @@ | ||
| 1029 | 1029 | ** * If iFrame is negative, then the nth frame up the stack, where |
| 1030 | 1030 | ** n is the absolute value of iFrame. A value of -1 means the |
| 1031 | 1031 | ** calling procedure. |
| 1032 | 1032 | ** |
| 1033 | 1033 | ** * If iFrame is +ve, then the nth frame from the bottom of the |
| 1034 | -** stack. An iFrame value of 1 means the toplevel (global) frame. | |
| 1034 | +** stack. An iFrame value of 1 means the top level (global) frame. | |
| 1035 | 1035 | */ |
| 1036 | 1036 | static Th_Frame *getFrame(Th_Interp *interp, int iFrame){ |
| 1037 | 1037 | Th_Frame *p = interp->pFrame; |
| 1038 | 1038 | int i; |
| 1039 | 1039 | if( iFrame>0 ){ |
| 1040 | 1040 |
| --- src/th.c | |
| +++ src/th.c | |
| @@ -1029,11 +1029,11 @@ | |
| 1029 | ** * If iFrame is negative, then the nth frame up the stack, where |
| 1030 | ** n is the absolute value of iFrame. A value of -1 means the |
| 1031 | ** calling procedure. |
| 1032 | ** |
| 1033 | ** * If iFrame is +ve, then the nth frame from the bottom of the |
| 1034 | ** stack. An iFrame value of 1 means the toplevel (global) frame. |
| 1035 | */ |
| 1036 | static Th_Frame *getFrame(Th_Interp *interp, int iFrame){ |
| 1037 | Th_Frame *p = interp->pFrame; |
| 1038 | int i; |
| 1039 | if( iFrame>0 ){ |
| 1040 |
| --- src/th.c | |
| +++ src/th.c | |
| @@ -1029,11 +1029,11 @@ | |
| 1029 | ** * If iFrame is negative, then the nth frame up the stack, where |
| 1030 | ** n is the absolute value of iFrame. A value of -1 means the |
| 1031 | ** calling procedure. |
| 1032 | ** |
| 1033 | ** * If iFrame is +ve, then the nth frame from the bottom of the |
| 1034 | ** stack. An iFrame value of 1 means the top level (global) frame. |
| 1035 | */ |
| 1036 | static Th_Frame *getFrame(Th_Interp *interp, int iFrame){ |
| 1037 | Th_Frame *p = interp->pFrame; |
| 1038 | int i; |
| 1039 | if( iFrame>0 ){ |
| 1040 |
+1
-1
| --- src/th_main.c | ||
| +++ src/th_main.c | ||
| @@ -74,11 +74,11 @@ | ||
| 74 | 74 | */ |
| 75 | 75 | #if defined(TH_MEMDEBUG) |
| 76 | 76 | /* |
| 77 | 77 | ** Global variable counting the number of outstanding calls to malloc() |
| 78 | 78 | ** made by the th1 implementation. This is used to catch memory leaks |
| 79 | -** in the interpreter. Obviously, it also means th1 is not threadsafe. | |
| 79 | +** in the interpreter. Obviously, it also means th1 is not thread-safe. | |
| 80 | 80 | */ |
| 81 | 81 | static int nOutstandingMalloc = 0; |
| 82 | 82 | |
| 83 | 83 | /* |
| 84 | 84 | ** Implementations of malloc() and free() to pass to the interpreter. |
| 85 | 85 |
| --- src/th_main.c | |
| +++ src/th_main.c | |
| @@ -74,11 +74,11 @@ | |
| 74 | */ |
| 75 | #if defined(TH_MEMDEBUG) |
| 76 | /* |
| 77 | ** Global variable counting the number of outstanding calls to malloc() |
| 78 | ** made by the th1 implementation. This is used to catch memory leaks |
| 79 | ** in the interpreter. Obviously, it also means th1 is not threadsafe. |
| 80 | */ |
| 81 | static int nOutstandingMalloc = 0; |
| 82 | |
| 83 | /* |
| 84 | ** Implementations of malloc() and free() to pass to the interpreter. |
| 85 |
| --- src/th_main.c | |
| +++ src/th_main.c | |
| @@ -74,11 +74,11 @@ | |
| 74 | */ |
| 75 | #if defined(TH_MEMDEBUG) |
| 76 | /* |
| 77 | ** Global variable counting the number of outstanding calls to malloc() |
| 78 | ** made by the th1 implementation. This is used to catch memory leaks |
| 79 | ** in the interpreter. Obviously, it also means th1 is not thread-safe. |
| 80 | */ |
| 81 | static int nOutstandingMalloc = 0; |
| 82 | |
| 83 | /* |
| 84 | ** Implementations of malloc() and free() to pass to the interpreter. |
| 85 |
+7
-7
| --- src/timeline.c | ||
| +++ src/timeline.c | ||
| @@ -22,11 +22,11 @@ | ||
| 22 | 22 | #include <string.h> |
| 23 | 23 | #include <time.h> |
| 24 | 24 | #include "timeline.h" |
| 25 | 25 | |
| 26 | 26 | /* |
| 27 | -** The value of one second in julianday notation | |
| 27 | +** The value of one second in Julian day notation | |
| 28 | 28 | */ |
| 29 | 29 | #define ONE_SECOND (1.0/86400.0) |
| 30 | 30 | |
| 31 | 31 | /* |
| 32 | 32 | ** timeline mode options |
| @@ -1045,11 +1045,11 @@ | ||
| 1045 | 1045 | ** Mnemonic: "Same Branch". |
| 1046 | 1046 | ** f: 0x01: a leaf node, 0x02: a closed leaf node. |
| 1047 | 1047 | ** au: An array of integers that define thick-line risers for branches. |
| 1048 | 1048 | ** The integers are in pairs. For each pair, the first integer is |
| 1049 | 1049 | ** is the rail on which the riser should run and the second integer |
| 1050 | - ** is the id of the node upto which the riser should run. If there | |
| 1050 | + ** is the id of the node up to which the riser should run. If there | |
| 1051 | 1051 | ** are no risers, this array does not exist. |
| 1052 | 1052 | ** mi: "merge-in". An array of integer rail positions from which |
| 1053 | 1053 | ** merge arrows should be drawn into this node. If the value is |
| 1054 | 1054 | ** negative, then the rail position is -1-mi[] and a thin merge-arrow |
| 1055 | 1055 | ** descender is drawn to the bottom of the screen. This array is |
| @@ -1623,12 +1623,12 @@ | ||
| 1623 | 1623 | ** COMMAND: test-endpoint |
| 1624 | 1624 | ** |
| 1625 | 1625 | ** Usage: fossil test-endpoint BASE TAG ?OPTIONS? |
| 1626 | 1626 | ** |
| 1627 | 1627 | ** Show the first check-in with TAG that is a descendant or ancestor |
| 1628 | -** of BASE. The first descendant checkin is shown by default. Use | |
| 1629 | -** the --backto to see the first ancestor checkin. | |
| 1628 | +** of BASE. The first descendant check-in is shown by default. Use | |
| 1629 | +** the --backto to see the first ancestor check-in. | |
| 1630 | 1630 | ** |
| 1631 | 1631 | ** Options: |
| 1632 | 1632 | ** |
| 1633 | 1633 | ** --backto Show ancestor. Others defaults to descendants. |
| 1634 | 1634 | */ |
| @@ -1800,11 +1800,11 @@ | ||
| 1800 | 1800 | int useDividers = P("nd")==0; /* Show dividers if "nd" is missing */ |
| 1801 | 1801 | int renameOnly = P("namechng")!=0; /* Show only check-ins that rename files */ |
| 1802 | 1802 | int forkOnly = PB("forks"); /* Show only forks and their children */ |
| 1803 | 1803 | int bisectLocal = PB("bisect"); /* Show the check-ins of the bisect */ |
| 1804 | 1804 | const char *zBisect = P("bid"); /* Bisect description */ |
| 1805 | - int cpOnly = PB("cherrypicks"); /* Show all cherrypick checkins */ | |
| 1805 | + int cpOnly = PB("cherrypicks"); /* Show all cherrypick check-ins */ | |
| 1806 | 1806 | int tmFlags = 0; /* Timeline flags */ |
| 1807 | 1807 | const char *zThisTag = 0; /* Suppress links to this tag */ |
| 1808 | 1808 | const char *zThisUser = 0; /* Suppress links to this user */ |
| 1809 | 1809 | HQuery url; /* URL for various branch links */ |
| 1810 | 1810 | int from_rid = name_to_typed_rid(P("from"),"ci"); /* from= for paths */ |
| @@ -2003,11 +2003,11 @@ | ||
| 2003 | 2003 | /* Finish preliminary processing of tag match queries. */ |
| 2004 | 2004 | matchStyle = match_style(zMatchStyle, MS_EXACT); |
| 2005 | 2005 | if( zTagName ){ |
| 2006 | 2006 | zType = "ci"; |
| 2007 | 2007 | if( matchStyle==MS_EXACT ){ |
| 2008 | - /* For exact maching, inhibit links to the selected tag. */ | |
| 2008 | + /* For exact matching, inhibit links to the selected tag. */ | |
| 2009 | 2009 | zThisTag = zTagName; |
| 2010 | 2010 | Th_StoreUnsafe("current_checkin", zTagName); |
| 2011 | 2011 | } |
| 2012 | 2012 | |
| 2013 | 2013 | /* Display a checkbox to enable/disable display of related check-ins. */ |
| @@ -3670,11 +3670,11 @@ | ||
| 3670 | 3670 | && fossil_isdigit(z[0]) |
| 3671 | 3671 | && fossil_isdigit(z[5]); |
| 3672 | 3672 | } |
| 3673 | 3673 | |
| 3674 | 3674 | /* |
| 3675 | -** Return true if the input string can be converted to a julianday. | |
| 3675 | +** Return true if the input string can be converted to a Julian day. | |
| 3676 | 3676 | */ |
| 3677 | 3677 | static int fossil_is_julianday(const char *zDate){ |
| 3678 | 3678 | return db_int(0, "SELECT EXISTS (SELECT julianday(%Q) AS jd" |
| 3679 | 3679 | " WHERE jd IS NOT NULL)", zDate); |
| 3680 | 3680 | } |
| 3681 | 3681 |
| --- src/timeline.c | |
| +++ src/timeline.c | |
| @@ -22,11 +22,11 @@ | |
| 22 | #include <string.h> |
| 23 | #include <time.h> |
| 24 | #include "timeline.h" |
| 25 | |
| 26 | /* |
| 27 | ** The value of one second in julianday notation |
| 28 | */ |
| 29 | #define ONE_SECOND (1.0/86400.0) |
| 30 | |
| 31 | /* |
| 32 | ** timeline mode options |
| @@ -1045,11 +1045,11 @@ | |
| 1045 | ** Mnemonic: "Same Branch". |
| 1046 | ** f: 0x01: a leaf node, 0x02: a closed leaf node. |
| 1047 | ** au: An array of integers that define thick-line risers for branches. |
| 1048 | ** The integers are in pairs. For each pair, the first integer is |
| 1049 | ** is the rail on which the riser should run and the second integer |
| 1050 | ** is the id of the node upto which the riser should run. If there |
| 1051 | ** are no risers, this array does not exist. |
| 1052 | ** mi: "merge-in". An array of integer rail positions from which |
| 1053 | ** merge arrows should be drawn into this node. If the value is |
| 1054 | ** negative, then the rail position is -1-mi[] and a thin merge-arrow |
| 1055 | ** descender is drawn to the bottom of the screen. This array is |
| @@ -1623,12 +1623,12 @@ | |
| 1623 | ** COMMAND: test-endpoint |
| 1624 | ** |
| 1625 | ** Usage: fossil test-endpoint BASE TAG ?OPTIONS? |
| 1626 | ** |
| 1627 | ** Show the first check-in with TAG that is a descendant or ancestor |
| 1628 | ** of BASE. The first descendant checkin is shown by default. Use |
| 1629 | ** the --backto to see the first ancestor checkin. |
| 1630 | ** |
| 1631 | ** Options: |
| 1632 | ** |
| 1633 | ** --backto Show ancestor. Others defaults to descendants. |
| 1634 | */ |
| @@ -1800,11 +1800,11 @@ | |
| 1800 | int useDividers = P("nd")==0; /* Show dividers if "nd" is missing */ |
| 1801 | int renameOnly = P("namechng")!=0; /* Show only check-ins that rename files */ |
| 1802 | int forkOnly = PB("forks"); /* Show only forks and their children */ |
| 1803 | int bisectLocal = PB("bisect"); /* Show the check-ins of the bisect */ |
| 1804 | const char *zBisect = P("bid"); /* Bisect description */ |
| 1805 | int cpOnly = PB("cherrypicks"); /* Show all cherrypick checkins */ |
| 1806 | int tmFlags = 0; /* Timeline flags */ |
| 1807 | const char *zThisTag = 0; /* Suppress links to this tag */ |
| 1808 | const char *zThisUser = 0; /* Suppress links to this user */ |
| 1809 | HQuery url; /* URL for various branch links */ |
| 1810 | int from_rid = name_to_typed_rid(P("from"),"ci"); /* from= for paths */ |
| @@ -2003,11 +2003,11 @@ | |
| 2003 | /* Finish preliminary processing of tag match queries. */ |
| 2004 | matchStyle = match_style(zMatchStyle, MS_EXACT); |
| 2005 | if( zTagName ){ |
| 2006 | zType = "ci"; |
| 2007 | if( matchStyle==MS_EXACT ){ |
| 2008 | /* For exact maching, inhibit links to the selected tag. */ |
| 2009 | zThisTag = zTagName; |
| 2010 | Th_StoreUnsafe("current_checkin", zTagName); |
| 2011 | } |
| 2012 | |
| 2013 | /* Display a checkbox to enable/disable display of related check-ins. */ |
| @@ -3670,11 +3670,11 @@ | |
| 3670 | && fossil_isdigit(z[0]) |
| 3671 | && fossil_isdigit(z[5]); |
| 3672 | } |
| 3673 | |
| 3674 | /* |
| 3675 | ** Return true if the input string can be converted to a julianday. |
| 3676 | */ |
| 3677 | static int fossil_is_julianday(const char *zDate){ |
| 3678 | return db_int(0, "SELECT EXISTS (SELECT julianday(%Q) AS jd" |
| 3679 | " WHERE jd IS NOT NULL)", zDate); |
| 3680 | } |
| 3681 |
| --- src/timeline.c | |
| +++ src/timeline.c | |
| @@ -22,11 +22,11 @@ | |
| 22 | #include <string.h> |
| 23 | #include <time.h> |
| 24 | #include "timeline.h" |
| 25 | |
| 26 | /* |
| 27 | ** The value of one second in Julian day notation |
| 28 | */ |
| 29 | #define ONE_SECOND (1.0/86400.0) |
| 30 | |
| 31 | /* |
| 32 | ** timeline mode options |
| @@ -1045,11 +1045,11 @@ | |
| 1045 | ** Mnemonic: "Same Branch". |
| 1046 | ** f: 0x01: a leaf node, 0x02: a closed leaf node. |
| 1047 | ** au: An array of integers that define thick-line risers for branches. |
| 1048 | ** The integers are in pairs. For each pair, the first integer is |
| 1049 | ** is the rail on which the riser should run and the second integer |
| 1050 | ** is the id of the node up to which the riser should run. If there |
| 1051 | ** are no risers, this array does not exist. |
| 1052 | ** mi: "merge-in". An array of integer rail positions from which |
| 1053 | ** merge arrows should be drawn into this node. If the value is |
| 1054 | ** negative, then the rail position is -1-mi[] and a thin merge-arrow |
| 1055 | ** descender is drawn to the bottom of the screen. This array is |
| @@ -1623,12 +1623,12 @@ | |
| 1623 | ** COMMAND: test-endpoint |
| 1624 | ** |
| 1625 | ** Usage: fossil test-endpoint BASE TAG ?OPTIONS? |
| 1626 | ** |
| 1627 | ** Show the first check-in with TAG that is a descendant or ancestor |
| 1628 | ** of BASE. The first descendant check-in is shown by default. Use |
| 1629 | ** the --backto to see the first ancestor check-in. |
| 1630 | ** |
| 1631 | ** Options: |
| 1632 | ** |
| 1633 | ** --backto Show ancestor. Others defaults to descendants. |
| 1634 | */ |
| @@ -1800,11 +1800,11 @@ | |
| 1800 | int useDividers = P("nd")==0; /* Show dividers if "nd" is missing */ |
| 1801 | int renameOnly = P("namechng")!=0; /* Show only check-ins that rename files */ |
| 1802 | int forkOnly = PB("forks"); /* Show only forks and their children */ |
| 1803 | int bisectLocal = PB("bisect"); /* Show the check-ins of the bisect */ |
| 1804 | const char *zBisect = P("bid"); /* Bisect description */ |
| 1805 | int cpOnly = PB("cherrypicks"); /* Show all cherrypick check-ins */ |
| 1806 | int tmFlags = 0; /* Timeline flags */ |
| 1807 | const char *zThisTag = 0; /* Suppress links to this tag */ |
| 1808 | const char *zThisUser = 0; /* Suppress links to this user */ |
| 1809 | HQuery url; /* URL for various branch links */ |
| 1810 | int from_rid = name_to_typed_rid(P("from"),"ci"); /* from= for paths */ |
| @@ -2003,11 +2003,11 @@ | |
| 2003 | /* Finish preliminary processing of tag match queries. */ |
| 2004 | matchStyle = match_style(zMatchStyle, MS_EXACT); |
| 2005 | if( zTagName ){ |
| 2006 | zType = "ci"; |
| 2007 | if( matchStyle==MS_EXACT ){ |
| 2008 | /* For exact matching, inhibit links to the selected tag. */ |
| 2009 | zThisTag = zTagName; |
| 2010 | Th_StoreUnsafe("current_checkin", zTagName); |
| 2011 | } |
| 2012 | |
| 2013 | /* Display a checkbox to enable/disable display of related check-ins. */ |
| @@ -3670,11 +3670,11 @@ | |
| 3670 | && fossil_isdigit(z[0]) |
| 3671 | && fossil_isdigit(z[5]); |
| 3672 | } |
| 3673 | |
| 3674 | /* |
| 3675 | ** Return true if the input string can be converted to a Julian day. |
| 3676 | */ |
| 3677 | static int fossil_is_julianday(const char *zDate){ |
| 3678 | return db_int(0, "SELECT EXISTS (SELECT julianday(%Q) AS jd" |
| 3679 | " WHERE jd IS NOT NULL)", zDate); |
| 3680 | } |
| 3681 |
+2
-2
| --- src/tkt.c | ||
| +++ src/tkt.c | ||
| @@ -1528,11 +1528,11 @@ | ||
| 1528 | 1528 | ** Run the ticket report, identified by the report format title |
| 1529 | 1529 | ** used in the GUI. The data is written as flat file on stdout, |
| 1530 | 1530 | ** using TAB as separator. The separator can be changed using |
| 1531 | 1531 | ** the -l or --limit option. |
| 1532 | 1532 | ** |
| 1533 | -** If TICKETFILTER is given on the commandline, the query is | |
| 1533 | +** If TICKETFILTER is given on the command line, the query is | |
| 1534 | 1534 | ** limited with a new WHERE-condition. |
| 1535 | 1535 | ** example: Report lists a column # with the uuid |
| 1536 | 1536 | ** TICKETFILTER may be [#]='uuuuuuuuu' |
| 1537 | 1537 | ** example: Report only lists rows with status not open |
| 1538 | 1538 | ** TICKETFILTER: status != 'open' |
| @@ -1567,11 +1567,11 @@ | ||
| 1567 | 1567 | ** names include: type, status, subsystem, priority, severity, foundin, |
| 1568 | 1568 | ** resolution, title, and comment, but other field names can be added |
| 1569 | 1569 | ** or substituted in customized installations. |
| 1570 | 1570 | ** |
| 1571 | 1571 | ** If you use +FIELD, the VALUE is appended to the field FIELD. You |
| 1572 | -** can use more than one field/value pair on the commandline. Using | |
| 1572 | +** can use more than one field/value pair on the command line. Using | |
| 1573 | 1573 | ** --quote enables the special character decoding as in "ticket |
| 1574 | 1574 | ** show", which allows setting multiline text or text with special |
| 1575 | 1575 | ** characters. |
| 1576 | 1576 | ** |
| 1577 | 1577 | ** > fossil ticket add FIELD VALUE ?FIELD VALUE .. ? ?-q|--quote? |
| 1578 | 1578 |
| --- src/tkt.c | |
| +++ src/tkt.c | |
| @@ -1528,11 +1528,11 @@ | |
| 1528 | ** Run the ticket report, identified by the report format title |
| 1529 | ** used in the GUI. The data is written as flat file on stdout, |
| 1530 | ** using TAB as separator. The separator can be changed using |
| 1531 | ** the -l or --limit option. |
| 1532 | ** |
| 1533 | ** If TICKETFILTER is given on the commandline, the query is |
| 1534 | ** limited with a new WHERE-condition. |
| 1535 | ** example: Report lists a column # with the uuid |
| 1536 | ** TICKETFILTER may be [#]='uuuuuuuuu' |
| 1537 | ** example: Report only lists rows with status not open |
| 1538 | ** TICKETFILTER: status != 'open' |
| @@ -1567,11 +1567,11 @@ | |
| 1567 | ** names include: type, status, subsystem, priority, severity, foundin, |
| 1568 | ** resolution, title, and comment, but other field names can be added |
| 1569 | ** or substituted in customized installations. |
| 1570 | ** |
| 1571 | ** If you use +FIELD, the VALUE is appended to the field FIELD. You |
| 1572 | ** can use more than one field/value pair on the commandline. Using |
| 1573 | ** --quote enables the special character decoding as in "ticket |
| 1574 | ** show", which allows setting multiline text or text with special |
| 1575 | ** characters. |
| 1576 | ** |
| 1577 | ** > fossil ticket add FIELD VALUE ?FIELD VALUE .. ? ?-q|--quote? |
| 1578 |
| --- src/tkt.c | |
| +++ src/tkt.c | |
| @@ -1528,11 +1528,11 @@ | |
| 1528 | ** Run the ticket report, identified by the report format title |
| 1529 | ** used in the GUI. The data is written as flat file on stdout, |
| 1530 | ** using TAB as separator. The separator can be changed using |
| 1531 | ** the -l or --limit option. |
| 1532 | ** |
| 1533 | ** If TICKETFILTER is given on the command line, the query is |
| 1534 | ** limited with a new WHERE-condition. |
| 1535 | ** example: Report lists a column # with the uuid |
| 1536 | ** TICKETFILTER may be [#]='uuuuuuuuu' |
| 1537 | ** example: Report only lists rows with status not open |
| 1538 | ** TICKETFILTER: status != 'open' |
| @@ -1567,11 +1567,11 @@ | |
| 1567 | ** names include: type, status, subsystem, priority, severity, foundin, |
| 1568 | ** resolution, title, and comment, but other field names can be added |
| 1569 | ** or substituted in customized installations. |
| 1570 | ** |
| 1571 | ** If you use +FIELD, the VALUE is appended to the field FIELD. You |
| 1572 | ** can use more than one field/value pair on the command line. Using |
| 1573 | ** --quote enables the special character decoding as in "ticket |
| 1574 | ** show", which allows setting multiline text or text with special |
| 1575 | ** characters. |
| 1576 | ** |
| 1577 | ** > fossil ticket add FIELD VALUE ?FIELD VALUE .. ? ?-q|--quote? |
| 1578 |
+1
-1
| --- src/tktsetup.c | ||
| +++ src/tktsetup.c | ||
| @@ -1018,11 +1018,11 @@ | ||
| 1018 | 1018 | } |
| 1019 | 1019 | |
| 1020 | 1020 | /* |
| 1021 | 1021 | ** WEBPAGE: tktsetup_timeline |
| 1022 | 1022 | ** |
| 1023 | -** Administrative page used ot configure how tickets are | |
| 1023 | +** Administrative page used to configure how tickets are | |
| 1024 | 1024 | ** rendered on timeline views. |
| 1025 | 1025 | */ |
| 1026 | 1026 | void tktsetup_timeline_page(void){ |
| 1027 | 1027 | login_check_credentials(); |
| 1028 | 1028 | if( !g.perm.Setup ){ |
| 1029 | 1029 |
| --- src/tktsetup.c | |
| +++ src/tktsetup.c | |
| @@ -1018,11 +1018,11 @@ | |
| 1018 | } |
| 1019 | |
| 1020 | /* |
| 1021 | ** WEBPAGE: tktsetup_timeline |
| 1022 | ** |
| 1023 | ** Administrative page used ot configure how tickets are |
| 1024 | ** rendered on timeline views. |
| 1025 | */ |
| 1026 | void tktsetup_timeline_page(void){ |
| 1027 | login_check_credentials(); |
| 1028 | if( !g.perm.Setup ){ |
| 1029 |
| --- src/tktsetup.c | |
| +++ src/tktsetup.c | |
| @@ -1018,11 +1018,11 @@ | |
| 1018 | } |
| 1019 | |
| 1020 | /* |
| 1021 | ** WEBPAGE: tktsetup_timeline |
| 1022 | ** |
| 1023 | ** Administrative page used to configure how tickets are |
| 1024 | ** rendered on timeline views. |
| 1025 | */ |
| 1026 | void tktsetup_timeline_page(void){ |
| 1027 | login_check_credentials(); |
| 1028 | if( !g.perm.Setup ){ |
| 1029 |
+2
-2
| --- src/undo.c | ||
| +++ src/undo.c | ||
| @@ -23,11 +23,11 @@ | ||
| 23 | 23 | #if INTERFACE |
| 24 | 24 | /* |
| 25 | 25 | ** Possible return values from the undo_maybe_save() routine. |
| 26 | 26 | */ |
| 27 | 27 | #define UNDO_NONE (0) /* Placeholder only used to initialize vars. */ |
| 28 | -#define UNDO_SAVED_OK (1) /* The specified file was saved succesfully. */ | |
| 28 | +#define UNDO_SAVED_OK (1) /* The specified file was saved successfully. */ | |
| 29 | 29 | #define UNDO_DISABLED (2) /* File not saved, subsystem is disabled. */ |
| 30 | 30 | #define UNDO_INACTIVE (3) /* File not saved, subsystem is not active. */ |
| 31 | 31 | #define UNDO_TOOBIG (4) /* File not saved, it exceeded a size limit. */ |
| 32 | 32 | #endif |
| 33 | 33 | |
| @@ -289,11 +289,11 @@ | ||
| 289 | 289 | ** function instead. |
| 290 | 290 | ** |
| 291 | 291 | ** The return value of this function will always be one of the |
| 292 | 292 | ** following codes: |
| 293 | 293 | ** |
| 294 | -** UNDO_SAVED_OK: The specified file was saved succesfully. | |
| 294 | +** UNDO_SAVED_OK: The specified file was saved successfully. | |
| 295 | 295 | ** |
| 296 | 296 | ** UNDO_DISABLED: The specified file was NOT saved, because the |
| 297 | 297 | ** "undo subsystem" is disabled. This error may |
| 298 | 298 | ** indicate that a call to undo_disable() was |
| 299 | 299 | ** issued. |
| 300 | 300 |
| --- src/undo.c | |
| +++ src/undo.c | |
| @@ -23,11 +23,11 @@ | |
| 23 | #if INTERFACE |
| 24 | /* |
| 25 | ** Possible return values from the undo_maybe_save() routine. |
| 26 | */ |
| 27 | #define UNDO_NONE (0) /* Placeholder only used to initialize vars. */ |
| 28 | #define UNDO_SAVED_OK (1) /* The specified file was saved succesfully. */ |
| 29 | #define UNDO_DISABLED (2) /* File not saved, subsystem is disabled. */ |
| 30 | #define UNDO_INACTIVE (3) /* File not saved, subsystem is not active. */ |
| 31 | #define UNDO_TOOBIG (4) /* File not saved, it exceeded a size limit. */ |
| 32 | #endif |
| 33 | |
| @@ -289,11 +289,11 @@ | |
| 289 | ** function instead. |
| 290 | ** |
| 291 | ** The return value of this function will always be one of the |
| 292 | ** following codes: |
| 293 | ** |
| 294 | ** UNDO_SAVED_OK: The specified file was saved succesfully. |
| 295 | ** |
| 296 | ** UNDO_DISABLED: The specified file was NOT saved, because the |
| 297 | ** "undo subsystem" is disabled. This error may |
| 298 | ** indicate that a call to undo_disable() was |
| 299 | ** issued. |
| 300 |
| --- src/undo.c | |
| +++ src/undo.c | |
| @@ -23,11 +23,11 @@ | |
| 23 | #if INTERFACE |
| 24 | /* |
| 25 | ** Possible return values from the undo_maybe_save() routine. |
| 26 | */ |
| 27 | #define UNDO_NONE (0) /* Placeholder only used to initialize vars. */ |
| 28 | #define UNDO_SAVED_OK (1) /* The specified file was saved successfully. */ |
| 29 | #define UNDO_DISABLED (2) /* File not saved, subsystem is disabled. */ |
| 30 | #define UNDO_INACTIVE (3) /* File not saved, subsystem is not active. */ |
| 31 | #define UNDO_TOOBIG (4) /* File not saved, it exceeded a size limit. */ |
| 32 | #endif |
| 33 | |
| @@ -289,11 +289,11 @@ | |
| 289 | ** function instead. |
| 290 | ** |
| 291 | ** The return value of this function will always be one of the |
| 292 | ** following codes: |
| 293 | ** |
| 294 | ** UNDO_SAVED_OK: The specified file was saved successfully. |
| 295 | ** |
| 296 | ** UNDO_DISABLED: The specified file was NOT saved, because the |
| 297 | ** "undo subsystem" is disabled. This error may |
| 298 | ** indicate that a call to undo_disable() was |
| 299 | ** issued. |
| 300 |
+1
-1
| --- src/unicode.c | ||
| +++ src/unicode.c | ||
| @@ -189,11 +189,11 @@ | ||
| 189 | 189 | /* |
| 190 | 190 | ** If the argument is a codepoint corresponding to a lowercase letter |
| 191 | 191 | ** in the ASCII range with a diacritic added, return the codepoint |
| 192 | 192 | ** of the ASCII letter only. For example, if passed 235 - "LATIN |
| 193 | 193 | ** SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS" - return 65 ("LATIN SMALL LETTER |
| 194 | -** E"). The resuls of passing a codepoint that corresponds to an | |
| 194 | +** E"). The results of passing a codepoint that corresponds to an | |
| 195 | 195 | ** uppercase letter are undefined. |
| 196 | 196 | */ |
| 197 | 197 | static int unicode_remove_diacritic(int c, int bComplex){ |
| 198 | 198 | static const unsigned short aDia[] = { |
| 199 | 199 | 0, 1797, 1848, 1859, 1891, 1928, 1940, 1995, |
| 200 | 200 |
| --- src/unicode.c | |
| +++ src/unicode.c | |
| @@ -189,11 +189,11 @@ | |
| 189 | /* |
| 190 | ** If the argument is a codepoint corresponding to a lowercase letter |
| 191 | ** in the ASCII range with a diacritic added, return the codepoint |
| 192 | ** of the ASCII letter only. For example, if passed 235 - "LATIN |
| 193 | ** SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS" - return 65 ("LATIN SMALL LETTER |
| 194 | ** E"). The resuls of passing a codepoint that corresponds to an |
| 195 | ** uppercase letter are undefined. |
| 196 | */ |
| 197 | static int unicode_remove_diacritic(int c, int bComplex){ |
| 198 | static const unsigned short aDia[] = { |
| 199 | 0, 1797, 1848, 1859, 1891, 1928, 1940, 1995, |
| 200 |
| --- src/unicode.c | |
| +++ src/unicode.c | |
| @@ -189,11 +189,11 @@ | |
| 189 | /* |
| 190 | ** If the argument is a codepoint corresponding to a lowercase letter |
| 191 | ** in the ASCII range with a diacritic added, return the codepoint |
| 192 | ** of the ASCII letter only. For example, if passed 235 - "LATIN |
| 193 | ** SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS" - return 65 ("LATIN SMALL LETTER |
| 194 | ** E"). The results of passing a codepoint that corresponds to an |
| 195 | ** uppercase letter are undefined. |
| 196 | */ |
| 197 | static int unicode_remove_diacritic(int c, int bComplex){ |
| 198 | static const unsigned short aDia[] = { |
| 199 | 0, 1797, 1848, 1859, 1891, 1928, 1940, 1995, |
| 200 |
+2
-2
| --- src/update.c | ||
| +++ src/update.c | ||
| @@ -256,11 +256,11 @@ | ||
| 256 | 256 | fossil_fatal("missing content, unable to update"); |
| 257 | 257 | }; |
| 258 | 258 | |
| 259 | 259 | /* |
| 260 | 260 | ** The record.fn field is used to match files against each other. The |
| 261 | - ** FV table contains one row for each each unique filename in | |
| 261 | + ** FV table contains one row for each unique filename in | |
| 262 | 262 | ** in the current check-out, the pivot, and the version being merged. |
| 263 | 263 | */ |
| 264 | 264 | db_multi_exec( |
| 265 | 265 | "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS fv;" |
| 266 | 266 | "CREATE TEMP TABLE fv(" |
| @@ -451,11 +451,11 @@ | ||
| 451 | 451 | }else if( idt>0 && idv==0 ){ |
| 452 | 452 | /* File added in the target. */ |
| 453 | 453 | if( file_isfile_or_link(zFullPath) ){ |
| 454 | 454 | /* Name of backup file with Original content */ |
| 455 | 455 | char *zOrig = file_newname(zFullPath, "original", 1); |
| 456 | - /* Backup previously unanaged file before to be overwritten */ | |
| 456 | + /* Backup previously unmanaged file before being overwritten */ | |
| 457 | 457 | file_copy(zFullPath, zOrig); |
| 458 | 458 | fossil_free(zOrig); |
| 459 | 459 | fossil_print("ADD %s - overwrites an unmanaged file", zName); |
| 460 | 460 | if( !dryRunFlag ) fossil_print(", original copy backed up locally"); |
| 461 | 461 | fossil_print("\n"); |
| 462 | 462 |
| --- src/update.c | |
| +++ src/update.c | |
| @@ -256,11 +256,11 @@ | |
| 256 | fossil_fatal("missing content, unable to update"); |
| 257 | }; |
| 258 | |
| 259 | /* |
| 260 | ** The record.fn field is used to match files against each other. The |
| 261 | ** FV table contains one row for each each unique filename in |
| 262 | ** in the current check-out, the pivot, and the version being merged. |
| 263 | */ |
| 264 | db_multi_exec( |
| 265 | "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS fv;" |
| 266 | "CREATE TEMP TABLE fv(" |
| @@ -451,11 +451,11 @@ | |
| 451 | }else if( idt>0 && idv==0 ){ |
| 452 | /* File added in the target. */ |
| 453 | if( file_isfile_or_link(zFullPath) ){ |
| 454 | /* Name of backup file with Original content */ |
| 455 | char *zOrig = file_newname(zFullPath, "original", 1); |
| 456 | /* Backup previously unanaged file before to be overwritten */ |
| 457 | file_copy(zFullPath, zOrig); |
| 458 | fossil_free(zOrig); |
| 459 | fossil_print("ADD %s - overwrites an unmanaged file", zName); |
| 460 | if( !dryRunFlag ) fossil_print(", original copy backed up locally"); |
| 461 | fossil_print("\n"); |
| 462 |
| --- src/update.c | |
| +++ src/update.c | |
| @@ -256,11 +256,11 @@ | |
| 256 | fossil_fatal("missing content, unable to update"); |
| 257 | }; |
| 258 | |
| 259 | /* |
| 260 | ** The record.fn field is used to match files against each other. The |
| 261 | ** FV table contains one row for each unique filename in |
| 262 | ** in the current check-out, the pivot, and the version being merged. |
| 263 | */ |
| 264 | db_multi_exec( |
| 265 | "DROP TABLE IF EXISTS fv;" |
| 266 | "CREATE TEMP TABLE fv(" |
| @@ -451,11 +451,11 @@ | |
| 451 | }else if( idt>0 && idv==0 ){ |
| 452 | /* File added in the target. */ |
| 453 | if( file_isfile_or_link(zFullPath) ){ |
| 454 | /* Name of backup file with Original content */ |
| 455 | char *zOrig = file_newname(zFullPath, "original", 1); |
| 456 | /* Backup previously unmanaged file before being overwritten */ |
| 457 | file_copy(zFullPath, zOrig); |
| 458 | fossil_free(zOrig); |
| 459 | fossil_print("ADD %s - overwrites an unmanaged file", zName); |
| 460 | if( !dryRunFlag ) fossil_print(", original copy backed up locally"); |
| 461 | fossil_print("\n"); |
| 462 |
+1
-1
| --- src/util.c | ||
| +++ src/util.c | ||
| @@ -234,11 +234,11 @@ | ||
| 234 | 234 | |
| 235 | 235 | /* |
| 236 | 236 | ** Check the input string to ensure that it is safe to pass into system(). |
| 237 | 237 | ** A string is unsafe for system() on unix if it contains any of the following: |
| 238 | 238 | ** |
| 239 | -** * Any occurrance of '$' or '`' except single-quoted or after \ | |
| 239 | +** * Any occurrence of '$' or '`' except single-quoted or after \ | |
| 240 | 240 | ** * Any of the following characters, unquoted: ;|& or \n except |
| 241 | 241 | ** these characters are allowed as the very last character in the |
| 242 | 242 | ** string. |
| 243 | 243 | ** * Unbalanced single or double quotes |
| 244 | 244 | ** |
| 245 | 245 |
| --- src/util.c | |
| +++ src/util.c | |
| @@ -234,11 +234,11 @@ | |
| 234 | |
| 235 | /* |
| 236 | ** Check the input string to ensure that it is safe to pass into system(). |
| 237 | ** A string is unsafe for system() on unix if it contains any of the following: |
| 238 | ** |
| 239 | ** * Any occurrance of '$' or '`' except single-quoted or after \ |
| 240 | ** * Any of the following characters, unquoted: ;|& or \n except |
| 241 | ** these characters are allowed as the very last character in the |
| 242 | ** string. |
| 243 | ** * Unbalanced single or double quotes |
| 244 | ** |
| 245 |
| --- src/util.c | |
| +++ src/util.c | |
| @@ -234,11 +234,11 @@ | |
| 234 | |
| 235 | /* |
| 236 | ** Check the input string to ensure that it is safe to pass into system(). |
| 237 | ** A string is unsafe for system() on unix if it contains any of the following: |
| 238 | ** |
| 239 | ** * Any occurrence of '$' or '`' except single-quoted or after \ |
| 240 | ** * Any of the following characters, unquoted: ;|& or \n except |
| 241 | ** these characters are allowed as the very last character in the |
| 242 | ** string. |
| 243 | ** * Unbalanced single or double quotes |
| 244 | ** |
| 245 |
+1
-1
| --- src/wiki.c | ||
| +++ src/wiki.c | ||
| @@ -2273,11 +2273,11 @@ | ||
| 2273 | 2273 | ** of timestamp with the most recent |
| 2274 | 2274 | ** first. |
| 2275 | 2275 | ** -a|--show-associated Show wiki pages associated with |
| 2276 | 2276 | ** check-ins and branches. |
| 2277 | 2277 | ** -s|--show-technote-ids The id of the tech note will be listed |
| 2278 | -** along side the timestamp. The tech note | |
| 2278 | +** alongside the timestamp. The tech note | |
| 2279 | 2279 | ** id will be the first word on each line. |
| 2280 | 2280 | ** This option only applies if the |
| 2281 | 2281 | ** --technote option is also specified. |
| 2282 | 2282 | ** |
| 2283 | 2283 | ** DATETIME may be "now" or "YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS.SSS". If in |
| 2284 | 2284 |
| --- src/wiki.c | |
| +++ src/wiki.c | |
| @@ -2273,11 +2273,11 @@ | |
| 2273 | ** of timestamp with the most recent |
| 2274 | ** first. |
| 2275 | ** -a|--show-associated Show wiki pages associated with |
| 2276 | ** check-ins and branches. |
| 2277 | ** -s|--show-technote-ids The id of the tech note will be listed |
| 2278 | ** along side the timestamp. The tech note |
| 2279 | ** id will be the first word on each line. |
| 2280 | ** This option only applies if the |
| 2281 | ** --technote option is also specified. |
| 2282 | ** |
| 2283 | ** DATETIME may be "now" or "YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS.SSS". If in |
| 2284 |
| --- src/wiki.c | |
| +++ src/wiki.c | |
| @@ -2273,11 +2273,11 @@ | |
| 2273 | ** of timestamp with the most recent |
| 2274 | ** first. |
| 2275 | ** -a|--show-associated Show wiki pages associated with |
| 2276 | ** check-ins and branches. |
| 2277 | ** -s|--show-technote-ids The id of the tech note will be listed |
| 2278 | ** alongside the timestamp. The tech note |
| 2279 | ** id will be the first word on each line. |
| 2280 | ** This option only applies if the |
| 2281 | ** --technote option is also specified. |
| 2282 | ** |
| 2283 | ** DATETIME may be "now" or "YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS.SSS". If in |
| 2284 |
+5
-5
| --- src/wikiformat.c | ||
| +++ src/wikiformat.c | ||
| @@ -25,11 +25,11 @@ | ||
| 25 | 25 | /* |
| 26 | 26 | ** Allowed wiki transformation operations |
| 27 | 27 | */ |
| 28 | 28 | #define WIKI_HTMLONLY 0x0001 /* HTML markup only. No wiki */ |
| 29 | 29 | #define WIKI_INLINE 0x0002 /* Do not surround with <p>..</p> */ |
| 30 | -/* avalable for reuse: 0x0004 --- formerly WIKI_NOBLOCK */ | |
| 30 | +/* available for reuse: 0x0004 --- formerly WIKI_NOBLOCK */ | |
| 31 | 31 | #define WIKI_BUTTONS 0x0008 /* Allow sub-menu buttons */ |
| 32 | 32 | #define WIKI_NOBADLINKS 0x0010 /* Ignore broken hyperlinks */ |
| 33 | 33 | #define WIKI_LINKSONLY 0x0020 /* No markup. Only decorate links */ |
| 34 | 34 | #define WIKI_NEWLINE 0x0040 /* Honor \n - break lines at each \n */ |
| 35 | 35 | #define WIKI_MARKDOWNLINKS 0x0080 /* Resolve hyperlinks as in markdown */ |
| @@ -566,11 +566,11 @@ | ||
| 566 | 566 | ** & |
| 567 | 567 | ** \n |
| 568 | 568 | ** [ |
| 569 | 569 | ** |
| 570 | 570 | ** The "[" is only considered if flags contain ALLOW_LINKS or ALLOW_WIKI. |
| 571 | -** The "\n" is only considered interesting if the flags constains ALLOW_WIKI. | |
| 571 | +** The "\n" is only considered interesting if the flags contains ALLOW_WIKI. | |
| 572 | 572 | */ |
| 573 | 573 | static int textLength(const char *z, int flags){ |
| 574 | 574 | const char *zReject; |
| 575 | 575 | if( flags & ALLOW_WIKI ){ |
| 576 | 576 | zReject = "<&[\n"; |
| @@ -1811,11 +1811,11 @@ | ||
| 1811 | 1811 | /* Enter <verbatim> processing. With verbatim enabled, all other |
| 1812 | 1812 | ** markup other than the corresponding end-tag with the same ID is |
| 1813 | 1813 | ** ignored. |
| 1814 | 1814 | */ |
| 1815 | 1815 | if( markup.iCode==MARKUP_VERBATIM ){ |
| 1816 | - int ii; //, vAttrDidAppend=0; | |
| 1816 | + int ii; /*, vAttrDidAppend=0;*/ | |
| 1817 | 1817 | const char *zClass = 0; |
| 1818 | 1818 | p->zVerbatimId = 0; |
| 1819 | 1819 | p->inVerbatim = 1; |
| 1820 | 1820 | p->preVerbState = p->state; |
| 1821 | 1821 | p->state &= ~ALLOW_WIKI; |
| @@ -2745,11 +2745,11 @@ | ||
| 2745 | 2745 | p->nAlloc = 0; |
| 2746 | 2746 | p->aStack = p->aSpace; |
| 2747 | 2747 | } |
| 2748 | 2748 | |
| 2749 | 2749 | /* |
| 2750 | -** Push a new element onto the tag statk | |
| 2750 | +** Push a new element onto the tag stack | |
| 2751 | 2751 | */ |
| 2752 | 2752 | static void html_tagstack_push(HtmlTagStack *p, int e){ |
| 2753 | 2753 | if( p->n>=ArraySize(p->aSpace) && p->n>=p->nAlloc ){ |
| 2754 | 2754 | if( p->nAlloc==0 ){ |
| 2755 | 2755 | int *aNew; |
| @@ -2813,11 +2813,11 @@ | ||
| 2813 | 2813 | ** |
| 2814 | 2814 | ** When safe_html() is asked to sanitize some HTML, it will ignore |
| 2815 | 2815 | ** any text in between two consecutive instances of the nonce. The |
| 2816 | 2816 | ** nonce itself is an HTML comment so it is harmless to keep the |
| 2817 | 2817 | ** nonce in the middle of the HTML stream. A different nonce is |
| 2818 | -** choosen each time Fossil is run, using a lot of randomness, so | |
| 2818 | +** chosen each time Fossil is run, using a lot of randomness, so | |
| 2819 | 2819 | ** an attacker will be unable to guess the nonce in advance. |
| 2820 | 2820 | ** |
| 2821 | 2821 | ** The original use-case for this mechanism is to allow Pikchr-generated |
| 2822 | 2822 | ** SVG in the middle of HTML generated from Markdown. The Markdown |
| 2823 | 2823 | ** output will normally be processed by safe_html() to prevent accidental |
| 2824 | 2824 |
| --- src/wikiformat.c | |
| +++ src/wikiformat.c | |
| @@ -25,11 +25,11 @@ | |
| 25 | /* |
| 26 | ** Allowed wiki transformation operations |
| 27 | */ |
| 28 | #define WIKI_HTMLONLY 0x0001 /* HTML markup only. No wiki */ |
| 29 | #define WIKI_INLINE 0x0002 /* Do not surround with <p>..</p> */ |
| 30 | /* avalable for reuse: 0x0004 --- formerly WIKI_NOBLOCK */ |
| 31 | #define WIKI_BUTTONS 0x0008 /* Allow sub-menu buttons */ |
| 32 | #define WIKI_NOBADLINKS 0x0010 /* Ignore broken hyperlinks */ |
| 33 | #define WIKI_LINKSONLY 0x0020 /* No markup. Only decorate links */ |
| 34 | #define WIKI_NEWLINE 0x0040 /* Honor \n - break lines at each \n */ |
| 35 | #define WIKI_MARKDOWNLINKS 0x0080 /* Resolve hyperlinks as in markdown */ |
| @@ -566,11 +566,11 @@ | |
| 566 | ** & |
| 567 | ** \n |
| 568 | ** [ |
| 569 | ** |
| 570 | ** The "[" is only considered if flags contain ALLOW_LINKS or ALLOW_WIKI. |
| 571 | ** The "\n" is only considered interesting if the flags constains ALLOW_WIKI. |
| 572 | */ |
| 573 | static int textLength(const char *z, int flags){ |
| 574 | const char *zReject; |
| 575 | if( flags & ALLOW_WIKI ){ |
| 576 | zReject = "<&[\n"; |
| @@ -1811,11 +1811,11 @@ | |
| 1811 | /* Enter <verbatim> processing. With verbatim enabled, all other |
| 1812 | ** markup other than the corresponding end-tag with the same ID is |
| 1813 | ** ignored. |
| 1814 | */ |
| 1815 | if( markup.iCode==MARKUP_VERBATIM ){ |
| 1816 | int ii; //, vAttrDidAppend=0; |
| 1817 | const char *zClass = 0; |
| 1818 | p->zVerbatimId = 0; |
| 1819 | p->inVerbatim = 1; |
| 1820 | p->preVerbState = p->state; |
| 1821 | p->state &= ~ALLOW_WIKI; |
| @@ -2745,11 +2745,11 @@ | |
| 2745 | p->nAlloc = 0; |
| 2746 | p->aStack = p->aSpace; |
| 2747 | } |
| 2748 | |
| 2749 | /* |
| 2750 | ** Push a new element onto the tag statk |
| 2751 | */ |
| 2752 | static void html_tagstack_push(HtmlTagStack *p, int e){ |
| 2753 | if( p->n>=ArraySize(p->aSpace) && p->n>=p->nAlloc ){ |
| 2754 | if( p->nAlloc==0 ){ |
| 2755 | int *aNew; |
| @@ -2813,11 +2813,11 @@ | |
| 2813 | ** |
| 2814 | ** When safe_html() is asked to sanitize some HTML, it will ignore |
| 2815 | ** any text in between two consecutive instances of the nonce. The |
| 2816 | ** nonce itself is an HTML comment so it is harmless to keep the |
| 2817 | ** nonce in the middle of the HTML stream. A different nonce is |
| 2818 | ** choosen each time Fossil is run, using a lot of randomness, so |
| 2819 | ** an attacker will be unable to guess the nonce in advance. |
| 2820 | ** |
| 2821 | ** The original use-case for this mechanism is to allow Pikchr-generated |
| 2822 | ** SVG in the middle of HTML generated from Markdown. The Markdown |
| 2823 | ** output will normally be processed by safe_html() to prevent accidental |
| 2824 |
| --- src/wikiformat.c | |
| +++ src/wikiformat.c | |
| @@ -25,11 +25,11 @@ | |
| 25 | /* |
| 26 | ** Allowed wiki transformation operations |
| 27 | */ |
| 28 | #define WIKI_HTMLONLY 0x0001 /* HTML markup only. No wiki */ |
| 29 | #define WIKI_INLINE 0x0002 /* Do not surround with <p>..</p> */ |
| 30 | /* available for reuse: 0x0004 --- formerly WIKI_NOBLOCK */ |
| 31 | #define WIKI_BUTTONS 0x0008 /* Allow sub-menu buttons */ |
| 32 | #define WIKI_NOBADLINKS 0x0010 /* Ignore broken hyperlinks */ |
| 33 | #define WIKI_LINKSONLY 0x0020 /* No markup. Only decorate links */ |
| 34 | #define WIKI_NEWLINE 0x0040 /* Honor \n - break lines at each \n */ |
| 35 | #define WIKI_MARKDOWNLINKS 0x0080 /* Resolve hyperlinks as in markdown */ |
| @@ -566,11 +566,11 @@ | |
| 566 | ** & |
| 567 | ** \n |
| 568 | ** [ |
| 569 | ** |
| 570 | ** The "[" is only considered if flags contain ALLOW_LINKS or ALLOW_WIKI. |
| 571 | ** The "\n" is only considered interesting if the flags contains ALLOW_WIKI. |
| 572 | */ |
| 573 | static int textLength(const char *z, int flags){ |
| 574 | const char *zReject; |
| 575 | if( flags & ALLOW_WIKI ){ |
| 576 | zReject = "<&[\n"; |
| @@ -1811,11 +1811,11 @@ | |
| 1811 | /* Enter <verbatim> processing. With verbatim enabled, all other |
| 1812 | ** markup other than the corresponding end-tag with the same ID is |
| 1813 | ** ignored. |
| 1814 | */ |
| 1815 | if( markup.iCode==MARKUP_VERBATIM ){ |
| 1816 | int ii; /*, vAttrDidAppend=0;*/ |
| 1817 | const char *zClass = 0; |
| 1818 | p->zVerbatimId = 0; |
| 1819 | p->inVerbatim = 1; |
| 1820 | p->preVerbState = p->state; |
| 1821 | p->state &= ~ALLOW_WIKI; |
| @@ -2745,11 +2745,11 @@ | |
| 2745 | p->nAlloc = 0; |
| 2746 | p->aStack = p->aSpace; |
| 2747 | } |
| 2748 | |
| 2749 | /* |
| 2750 | ** Push a new element onto the tag stack |
| 2751 | */ |
| 2752 | static void html_tagstack_push(HtmlTagStack *p, int e){ |
| 2753 | if( p->n>=ArraySize(p->aSpace) && p->n>=p->nAlloc ){ |
| 2754 | if( p->nAlloc==0 ){ |
| 2755 | int *aNew; |
| @@ -2813,11 +2813,11 @@ | |
| 2813 | ** |
| 2814 | ** When safe_html() is asked to sanitize some HTML, it will ignore |
| 2815 | ** any text in between two consecutive instances of the nonce. The |
| 2816 | ** nonce itself is an HTML comment so it is harmless to keep the |
| 2817 | ** nonce in the middle of the HTML stream. A different nonce is |
| 2818 | ** chosen each time Fossil is run, using a lot of randomness, so |
| 2819 | ** an attacker will be unable to guess the nonce in advance. |
| 2820 | ** |
| 2821 | ** The original use-case for this mechanism is to allow Pikchr-generated |
| 2822 | ** SVG in the middle of HTML generated from Markdown. The Markdown |
| 2823 | ** output will normally be processed by safe_html() to prevent accidental |
| 2824 |
+1
-1
| --- src/winhttp.c | ||
| +++ src/winhttp.c | ||
| @@ -805,11 +805,11 @@ | ||
| 805 | 805 | (LPWSTR) &tmp, |
| 806 | 806 | 0, |
| 807 | 807 | NULL |
| 808 | 808 | ); |
| 809 | 809 | if( !nMsg ){ |
| 810 | - /* No english, get what the system has available. */ | |
| 810 | + /* No English, get what the system has available. */ | |
| 811 | 811 | nMsg = FormatMessageW( |
| 812 | 812 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_ALLOCATE_BUFFER | |
| 813 | 813 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM | |
| 814 | 814 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_IGNORE_INSERTS, |
| 815 | 815 | NULL, |
| 816 | 816 |
| --- src/winhttp.c | |
| +++ src/winhttp.c | |
| @@ -805,11 +805,11 @@ | |
| 805 | (LPWSTR) &tmp, |
| 806 | 0, |
| 807 | NULL |
| 808 | ); |
| 809 | if( !nMsg ){ |
| 810 | /* No english, get what the system has available. */ |
| 811 | nMsg = FormatMessageW( |
| 812 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_ALLOCATE_BUFFER | |
| 813 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM | |
| 814 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_IGNORE_INSERTS, |
| 815 | NULL, |
| 816 |
| --- src/winhttp.c | |
| +++ src/winhttp.c | |
| @@ -805,11 +805,11 @@ | |
| 805 | (LPWSTR) &tmp, |
| 806 | 0, |
| 807 | NULL |
| 808 | ); |
| 809 | if( !nMsg ){ |
| 810 | /* No English, get what the system has available. */ |
| 811 | nMsg = FormatMessageW( |
| 812 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_ALLOCATE_BUFFER | |
| 813 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_FROM_SYSTEM | |
| 814 | FORMAT_MESSAGE_IGNORE_INSERTS, |
| 815 | NULL, |
| 816 |
+2
-2
| --- src/xfer.c | ||
| +++ src/xfer.c | ||
| @@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ | ||
| 52 | 52 | int resync; /* Send igot cards for all holdings */ |
| 53 | 53 | u8 syncPrivate; /* True to enable syncing private content */ |
| 54 | 54 | u8 nextIsPrivate; /* If true, next "file" received is a private */ |
| 55 | 55 | u32 remoteVersion; /* Version of fossil running on the other side */ |
| 56 | 56 | u32 remoteDate; /* Date for specific client software edition */ |
| 57 | - u32 remoteTime; /* Time of date correspoding on remoteDate */ | |
| 57 | + u32 remoteTime; /* Time of date corresponding on remoteDate */ | |
| 58 | 58 | time_t maxTime; /* Time when this transfer should be finished */ |
| 59 | 59 | }; |
| 60 | 60 | |
| 61 | 61 | |
| 62 | 62 | /* |
| @@ -1216,11 +1216,11 @@ | ||
| 1216 | 1216 | return xfer_run_script(xfer_common_code(), 0, 0); |
| 1217 | 1217 | } |
| 1218 | 1218 | |
| 1219 | 1219 | /* |
| 1220 | 1220 | ** This routine makes a "syncwith:URL" entry in the CONFIG table to |
| 1221 | -** indicate that a sync is occuring with zUrl. | |
| 1221 | +** indicate that a sync is occurring with zUrl. | |
| 1222 | 1222 | ** |
| 1223 | 1223 | ** Add a "syncfrom:URL" entry instead of "syncwith:URL" if bSyncFrom is true. |
| 1224 | 1224 | */ |
| 1225 | 1225 | static void xfer_syncwith(const char *zUrl, int bSyncFrom){ |
| 1226 | 1226 | UrlData x; |
| 1227 | 1227 |
| --- src/xfer.c | |
| +++ src/xfer.c | |
| @@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ | |
| 52 | int resync; /* Send igot cards for all holdings */ |
| 53 | u8 syncPrivate; /* True to enable syncing private content */ |
| 54 | u8 nextIsPrivate; /* If true, next "file" received is a private */ |
| 55 | u32 remoteVersion; /* Version of fossil running on the other side */ |
| 56 | u32 remoteDate; /* Date for specific client software edition */ |
| 57 | u32 remoteTime; /* Time of date correspoding on remoteDate */ |
| 58 | time_t maxTime; /* Time when this transfer should be finished */ |
| 59 | }; |
| 60 | |
| 61 | |
| 62 | /* |
| @@ -1216,11 +1216,11 @@ | |
| 1216 | return xfer_run_script(xfer_common_code(), 0, 0); |
| 1217 | } |
| 1218 | |
| 1219 | /* |
| 1220 | ** This routine makes a "syncwith:URL" entry in the CONFIG table to |
| 1221 | ** indicate that a sync is occuring with zUrl. |
| 1222 | ** |
| 1223 | ** Add a "syncfrom:URL" entry instead of "syncwith:URL" if bSyncFrom is true. |
| 1224 | */ |
| 1225 | static void xfer_syncwith(const char *zUrl, int bSyncFrom){ |
| 1226 | UrlData x; |
| 1227 |
| --- src/xfer.c | |
| +++ src/xfer.c | |
| @@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ | |
| 52 | int resync; /* Send igot cards for all holdings */ |
| 53 | u8 syncPrivate; /* True to enable syncing private content */ |
| 54 | u8 nextIsPrivate; /* If true, next "file" received is a private */ |
| 55 | u32 remoteVersion; /* Version of fossil running on the other side */ |
| 56 | u32 remoteDate; /* Date for specific client software edition */ |
| 57 | u32 remoteTime; /* Time of date corresponding on remoteDate */ |
| 58 | time_t maxTime; /* Time when this transfer should be finished */ |
| 59 | }; |
| 60 | |
| 61 | |
| 62 | /* |
| @@ -1216,11 +1216,11 @@ | |
| 1216 | return xfer_run_script(xfer_common_code(), 0, 0); |
| 1217 | } |
| 1218 | |
| 1219 | /* |
| 1220 | ** This routine makes a "syncwith:URL" entry in the CONFIG table to |
| 1221 | ** indicate that a sync is occurring with zUrl. |
| 1222 | ** |
| 1223 | ** Add a "syncfrom:URL" entry instead of "syncwith:URL" if bSyncFrom is true. |
| 1224 | */ |
| 1225 | static void xfer_syncwith(const char *zUrl, int bSyncFrom){ |
| 1226 | UrlData x; |
| 1227 |
+3
-3
| --- src/xsystem.c | ||
| +++ src/xsystem.c | ||
| @@ -41,11 +41,11 @@ | ||
| 41 | 41 | (void)argv; |
| 42 | 42 | fossil_print("%z = ", cgi_iso8601_datestamp()); |
| 43 | 43 | fossil_print("%z\n", cgi_rfc822_datestamp(time(0))); |
| 44 | 44 | } |
| 45 | 45 | |
| 46 | -/* Present working diretory */ | |
| 46 | +/* Present working directory */ | |
| 47 | 47 | void xsystem_pwd(int argc, char **argv){ |
| 48 | 48 | char *zPwd = file_getcwd(0, 0); |
| 49 | 49 | fossil_print("%z\n", zPwd); |
| 50 | 50 | } |
| 51 | 51 | |
| @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ | ||
| 168 | 168 | file_directory_list_free(azList); |
| 169 | 169 | } |
| 170 | 170 | } |
| 171 | 171 | |
| 172 | 172 | /* |
| 173 | -** Return arguments to ORDER BY that will correctly sort the entires. | |
| 173 | +** Return arguments to ORDER BY that will correctly sort the entries. | |
| 174 | 174 | */ |
| 175 | 175 | static const char *xsystem_ls_orderby(int mFlags){ |
| 176 | 176 | static const char *zSortTypes[] = { |
| 177 | 177 | "fn COLLATE NOCASE", |
| 178 | 178 | "mtime DESC", |
| @@ -343,11 +343,11 @@ | ||
| 343 | 343 | |
| 344 | 344 | /* List files "ls" |
| 345 | 345 | ** Options: |
| 346 | 346 | ** |
| 347 | 347 | ** -a Show files that begin with "." |
| 348 | -** -C List by colums | |
| 348 | +** -C List by columns | |
| 349 | 349 | ** --color=WHEN Colorize output? |
| 350 | 350 | ** -d Show just directory names, not content |
| 351 | 351 | ** -l Long listing |
| 352 | 352 | ** -m Comma-separated list |
| 353 | 353 | ** -r Reverse sort |
| 354 | 354 |
| --- src/xsystem.c | |
| +++ src/xsystem.c | |
| @@ -41,11 +41,11 @@ | |
| 41 | (void)argv; |
| 42 | fossil_print("%z = ", cgi_iso8601_datestamp()); |
| 43 | fossil_print("%z\n", cgi_rfc822_datestamp(time(0))); |
| 44 | } |
| 45 | |
| 46 | /* Present working diretory */ |
| 47 | void xsystem_pwd(int argc, char **argv){ |
| 48 | char *zPwd = file_getcwd(0, 0); |
| 49 | fossil_print("%z\n", zPwd); |
| 50 | } |
| 51 | |
| @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ | |
| 168 | file_directory_list_free(azList); |
| 169 | } |
| 170 | } |
| 171 | |
| 172 | /* |
| 173 | ** Return arguments to ORDER BY that will correctly sort the entires. |
| 174 | */ |
| 175 | static const char *xsystem_ls_orderby(int mFlags){ |
| 176 | static const char *zSortTypes[] = { |
| 177 | "fn COLLATE NOCASE", |
| 178 | "mtime DESC", |
| @@ -343,11 +343,11 @@ | |
| 343 | |
| 344 | /* List files "ls" |
| 345 | ** Options: |
| 346 | ** |
| 347 | ** -a Show files that begin with "." |
| 348 | ** -C List by colums |
| 349 | ** --color=WHEN Colorize output? |
| 350 | ** -d Show just directory names, not content |
| 351 | ** -l Long listing |
| 352 | ** -m Comma-separated list |
| 353 | ** -r Reverse sort |
| 354 |
| --- src/xsystem.c | |
| +++ src/xsystem.c | |
| @@ -41,11 +41,11 @@ | |
| 41 | (void)argv; |
| 42 | fossil_print("%z = ", cgi_iso8601_datestamp()); |
| 43 | fossil_print("%z\n", cgi_rfc822_datestamp(time(0))); |
| 44 | } |
| 45 | |
| 46 | /* Present working directory */ |
| 47 | void xsystem_pwd(int argc, char **argv){ |
| 48 | char *zPwd = file_getcwd(0, 0); |
| 49 | fossil_print("%z\n", zPwd); |
| 50 | } |
| 51 | |
| @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ | |
| 168 | file_directory_list_free(azList); |
| 169 | } |
| 170 | } |
| 171 | |
| 172 | /* |
| 173 | ** Return arguments to ORDER BY that will correctly sort the entries. |
| 174 | */ |
| 175 | static const char *xsystem_ls_orderby(int mFlags){ |
| 176 | static const char *zSortTypes[] = { |
| 177 | "fn COLLATE NOCASE", |
| 178 | "mtime DESC", |
| @@ -343,11 +343,11 @@ | |
| 343 | |
| 344 | /* List files "ls" |
| 345 | ** Options: |
| 346 | ** |
| 347 | ** -a Show files that begin with "." |
| 348 | ** -C List by columns |
| 349 | ** --color=WHEN Colorize output? |
| 350 | ** -d Show just directory names, not content |
| 351 | ** -l Long listing |
| 352 | ** -m Comma-separated list |
| 353 | ** -r Reverse sort |
| 354 |
+2
-2
| --- src/zip.c | ||
| +++ src/zip.c | ||
| @@ -230,11 +230,11 @@ | ||
| 230 | 230 | dosTime = (H<<11) + (M<<5) + (S>>1); |
| 231 | 231 | dosDate = ((y-1980)<<9) + (m<<5) + d; |
| 232 | 232 | } |
| 233 | 233 | |
| 234 | 234 | /* |
| 235 | -** Set the date and time from a julian day number. | |
| 235 | +** Set the date and time from a Julian day number. | |
| 236 | 236 | */ |
| 237 | 237 | void zip_set_timedate(double rDate){ |
| 238 | 238 | char *zDate = db_text(0, "SELECT datetime(%.17g)", rDate); |
| 239 | 239 | zip_set_timedate_from_str(zDate); |
| 240 | 240 | fossil_free(zDate); |
| @@ -267,11 +267,11 @@ | ||
| 267 | 267 | char zHdr[30]; |
| 268 | 268 | char zExTime[13]; |
| 269 | 269 | char zBuf[100]; |
| 270 | 270 | char zOutBuf[100000]; |
| 271 | 271 | |
| 272 | - /* Fill in as much of the header as we know. | |
| 272 | + /* Fill inasmuch of the header as we know. | |
| 273 | 273 | */ |
| 274 | 274 | nameLen = (int)strlen(zName); |
| 275 | 275 | if( nameLen==0 ) return; |
| 276 | 276 | nBlob = pFile ? blob_size(pFile) : 0; |
| 277 | 277 | if( pFile ){ /* This is a file, possibly empty... */ |
| 278 | 278 |
| --- src/zip.c | |
| +++ src/zip.c | |
| @@ -230,11 +230,11 @@ | |
| 230 | dosTime = (H<<11) + (M<<5) + (S>>1); |
| 231 | dosDate = ((y-1980)<<9) + (m<<5) + d; |
| 232 | } |
| 233 | |
| 234 | /* |
| 235 | ** Set the date and time from a julian day number. |
| 236 | */ |
| 237 | void zip_set_timedate(double rDate){ |
| 238 | char *zDate = db_text(0, "SELECT datetime(%.17g)", rDate); |
| 239 | zip_set_timedate_from_str(zDate); |
| 240 | fossil_free(zDate); |
| @@ -267,11 +267,11 @@ | |
| 267 | char zHdr[30]; |
| 268 | char zExTime[13]; |
| 269 | char zBuf[100]; |
| 270 | char zOutBuf[100000]; |
| 271 | |
| 272 | /* Fill in as much of the header as we know. |
| 273 | */ |
| 274 | nameLen = (int)strlen(zName); |
| 275 | if( nameLen==0 ) return; |
| 276 | nBlob = pFile ? blob_size(pFile) : 0; |
| 277 | if( pFile ){ /* This is a file, possibly empty... */ |
| 278 |
| --- src/zip.c | |
| +++ src/zip.c | |
| @@ -230,11 +230,11 @@ | |
| 230 | dosTime = (H<<11) + (M<<5) + (S>>1); |
| 231 | dosDate = ((y-1980)<<9) + (m<<5) + d; |
| 232 | } |
| 233 | |
| 234 | /* |
| 235 | ** Set the date and time from a Julian day number. |
| 236 | */ |
| 237 | void zip_set_timedate(double rDate){ |
| 238 | char *zDate = db_text(0, "SELECT datetime(%.17g)", rDate); |
| 239 | zip_set_timedate_from_str(zDate); |
| 240 | fossil_free(zDate); |
| @@ -267,11 +267,11 @@ | |
| 267 | char zHdr[30]; |
| 268 | char zExTime[13]; |
| 269 | char zBuf[100]; |
| 270 | char zOutBuf[100000]; |
| 271 | |
| 272 | /* Fill inasmuch of the header as we know. |
| 273 | */ |
| 274 | nameLen = (int)strlen(zName); |
| 275 | if( nameLen==0 ) return; |
| 276 | nBlob = pFile ? blob_size(pFile) : 0; |
| 277 | if( pFile ){ /* This is a file, possibly empty... */ |
| 278 |
+1
-1
| --- tools/codecheck1.c | ||
| +++ tools/codecheck1.c | ||
| @@ -443,11 +443,11 @@ | ||
| 443 | 443 | const struct FmtFunc *pB = (const struct FmtFunc*)pBB; |
| 444 | 444 | return strcmp(pA->zFName, pB->zFName); |
| 445 | 445 | } |
| 446 | 446 | |
| 447 | 447 | /* |
| 448 | -** Determine if the indentifier zIdent of length nIndent is a Fossil | |
| 448 | +** Determine if the identifier zIdent of length nIndent is a Fossil | |
| 449 | 449 | ** internal interface that uses a printf-style argument. Return zero if not. |
| 450 | 450 | ** Return the index of the format string if true with the left-most |
| 451 | 451 | ** argument having an index of 1. |
| 452 | 452 | */ |
| 453 | 453 | static int isFormatFunc(const char *zIdent, int nIdent, unsigned *pFlags){ |
| 454 | 454 |
| --- tools/codecheck1.c | |
| +++ tools/codecheck1.c | |
| @@ -443,11 +443,11 @@ | |
| 443 | const struct FmtFunc *pB = (const struct FmtFunc*)pBB; |
| 444 | return strcmp(pA->zFName, pB->zFName); |
| 445 | } |
| 446 | |
| 447 | /* |
| 448 | ** Determine if the indentifier zIdent of length nIndent is a Fossil |
| 449 | ** internal interface that uses a printf-style argument. Return zero if not. |
| 450 | ** Return the index of the format string if true with the left-most |
| 451 | ** argument having an index of 1. |
| 452 | */ |
| 453 | static int isFormatFunc(const char *zIdent, int nIdent, unsigned *pFlags){ |
| 454 |
| --- tools/codecheck1.c | |
| +++ tools/codecheck1.c | |
| @@ -443,11 +443,11 @@ | |
| 443 | const struct FmtFunc *pB = (const struct FmtFunc*)pBB; |
| 444 | return strcmp(pA->zFName, pB->zFName); |
| 445 | } |
| 446 | |
| 447 | /* |
| 448 | ** Determine if the identifier zIdent of length nIndent is a Fossil |
| 449 | ** internal interface that uses a printf-style argument. Return zero if not. |
| 450 | ** Return the index of the format string if true with the left-most |
| 451 | ** argument having an index of 1. |
| 452 | */ |
| 453 | static int isFormatFunc(const char *zIdent, int nIdent, unsigned *pFlags){ |
| 454 |